Sharp MX M620N M550U/N/M620U/N/M700U/N Operation Manual Copier GB User To The 0aa2aef0 D537 4473 9f55 15071352c713

User Manual: Sharp MX-M620N to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 200 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

PART 1: GENERAL INFORMATION

• BEFORE USING

THE PRODUCT

•

MANAGING THE MACHINE

• PERIPHERAL DEVICES

PART 2: COPIER OPERATION

• MAKING COPIES

• CONVENIENT COPY

FUNCTIONS

•

MACHINE MAINTENANCE

(FOR COPYING)

• DOCUMENT FILING

FUNCTION

•

SPECIFICATIONS

1-1

2-1

3-1

4-1

5-1

6-1

7-1

8-1

Page

OPERATION MANUAL

(for general information and copier operation)

MODEL

MX-M550U

MX-M620U

MX-M700U

MX-M550N

MX-M620N

MX-M700N

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL

SYSTEM

Be sure to become thoroughly familiar with this manual to

gain the maximum benefi t from the product .

Before installin g this product, be sure to read the

installatio n requirement s and caution s sections .

Be sure to keep all operation manuals handy for reference

including this manual, the "Operation manual (for general

information and copier operation)" and operation manuals

for any optional equipment which has been installed .

Each instruction also covers the optional units used with these products.

Shielded interface cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with EMC regulations.

In some areas, the "POWER" switch positions are marked "I" and " " on the copier instead of "ON"

and "OFF".

The symbol " " denotes the copier is not completely de-energized but in a stand-by condition at

this "POWER" switch position.

If your copier is so marked, please read "I" for "ON" and " " for "OFF".

Caution!

For a complete electrical disconnection, pull out the main plug.

The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.

Trademark acknowledgments

The following trademarks and registered trademarks are used in conjunction with the machine and its peripheral devices and

accessories.

•Microsoft

®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0, Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Server

2003 and Internet Explorer® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other

countries.

• PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

• Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, and Safari are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple

Computer, Inc.

• Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.

• Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe

Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.

• PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.

• IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.

• Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.

• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.

Candid and Taffy are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may

be registered in certain jurisdictions. CG Omega, CG Times, Garamond Antiqua, Garamond Halbfett, Garamond Kursiv,

Garamond and Halbfett Kursiv are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Albertus,

Arial, Coronet, Gill Sans, Joanna and Times New Roman are trademarks of The Monotype Corporation registered in the United

States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Avant Garde, ITC Bookman, Lubalin Graph,

Mona Lisa, Zapf Chancery and Zapf Dingbats are trademarks of International Typeface Corporation registered in the United

States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Clarendon, Eurostile, Helvetica, Optima,

Palatino, Stempel Garamond, Times and Univers are trademarks of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG, which may be registered

in certain jurisdictions, exclusively licensed through Linotype Library GmbH, a wholly owned subsidiary of Heidelberger

Druckmaschinen AG. Apple Chancery, Chicago, Geneva, Monaco and New York are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc. and may

be registered in certain jurisdictions. HGGothicB, HGMinchoL, HGPGothicB and HGPMinchoL are trademarks of Ricoh

Company, Ltd. and may be registered in some jurisdictions. Wingdings is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and other countries. Marigold and Oxford are trademarks of Arthur Baker and may be registered in some

jurisdictions. Antique Olive is a trademark of Marcel Olive and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Hoefler Text is a trademark

of Johnathan Hoefler and may be registered in some jurisdictions. ITC is a trademark of International Typeface Corporation

registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Agfa is a trademark

of the Agfa-Gevaert Group and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Intellifont, MicroType and UFST are trademarks of

Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.

Macintosh and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and

other countries. PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated and may be registered in some jurisdictions. HP, PCL,

FontSmart and LaserJet are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company and may be registered in some jurisdictions. The Type 1

processor resident in Monotype Imaging's UFST product is under license from Electronics For Imaging, Inc. All other trademarks

are the property of their respective owners.

Part 1: General Information

0-1

Warranty

While every effort has been made to make this document as accurate and helpful as possible, SHARP Corporation makes

no warranty of any kind with regard to its content. All information included herein is subject to change without notice. SHARP

is not responsible for any loss or damages, direct or indirect, arising from or related to the use of this operation manual.

written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under copyright laws.

OPERATION MANUALS

The following operation manuals are provided for the machine. Please read the appropriate manuals as needed for

the features you wish to learn about.

●Operation manual (for general information and copier operation) (this manual)

The first half of this manual provides general information about the machine, including safety information, loading

paper, removing misfeeds, and regular maintenance.

The second half of the manual explains how to use the copy and document filing functions.

●Administrator settings guide

The administrator settings are used by the administrator of the machine to configure functions to meet the needs

of your workplace.

This guide explains administrator settings for machine management, copying, and document filing. Administrator

settings for the fax, printer, network scanner and Internet fax functions are explained in the manuals for those

functions.

●Software setup guide

This manual mainly explains how to install and configure the software that allows the machine to be used as a

printer.

●Operation manual (for printer)*1

This manual explains the procedures for using the machine as a printer.

●Operation manual (for image send)*1

This manual explains the procedures for using the image send feature of the machine, including the network

scanner and Internet fax functions.

To use the network scanner function, the network function of the machine must be in a useable state*2 and the

network scanner expansion kit must be installed.

To use the Internet fax function, the network function of the machine must be in a useable state*2 and the network

scanner expansion kit and the Internet fax expansion kit must be installed.

*1The Operation manual (for printer) and the Operation manual (for image send) are provided as PDF files in the

CD-ROM.

These manuals are not provided as printed manuals.

*2On the MX-M550U/M620U/M700U, the network expansion kit is required.

NOTES

●Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the

manual, please contact your nearest authorised service representative.

●This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect

or other problem is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.

●Aside from instances provided for by law, SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during use of the

product or its options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for

any damage that occurs due to use of the product.

The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine

due to product improvements and modifications.

0-2

Improper installation may damage this product. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the

machine is moved.

1.The machine should be installed near an

accessible power outlet for easy connection.

2.Be sure to connect the power cord only to a

power outlet that meets the specified voltage and

current requirements. Also make certain the

outlet is properly grounded.

●For the power supply requirements, see the

name plate on the back of the main unit.

3.Do not install your machine in areas that are:

●damp, humid, or very dusty

●exposed to direct sunlight

●poorly ventilated

●subject to extreme temperature or humidity

changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater.

4.Be sure to allow the required space around the

machine for servicing and proper ventilation.

A small amount of ozone is produced within the printer during operation. The emission level is insufficient to cause

any health hazard.

NOTE:

The present recommended long term exposure limit for ozone is 0.1 ppm (0.2 mg/m3) calculated as an 8 hr. time-

weighted average concentration.

However, since the small amount that is emitted may have an objectionable odor, it is advisable to place the copier

in a ventilated area.

15cm

(6-1/8")

60cm

(23-5/8")

30cm

(11-13/16")

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

0-3

CAUTIONS

1.Do not touch the photoconductive drum. Scratches or smudges on the

drum will cause dirty prints.

2.The fusing unit is extremely hot. Exercise care in this area.

3.Do not look directly at the light source. Doing so may damage your

eyes.

4.Four adjusters are provided on all optional stand/paper drawer units.

These adjusters should be lowered until they contact the floor.

When moving the machine with the optional stand/paper drawer, be

sure to raise the adjusters. Also, unlock the two casters at the front of

the optional stand/paper drawer. After moving the machine, lower the

four adjusters until they reach the floor and lock the two casters.

5.Do not make any modifications to this machine. Doing so may result in

personal injury or damage to the machine.

6.Since this machine is heavy, it is recommended that it be moved by

more than one person to prevent injury.

7.When connecting this machine to a computer, be sure to first turn both

the computer and the machine off.

8.Do not make copies of anything which is prohibited from copying by law.

The following items are normally prohibited from printing by national

law. Other items may be prohibited by local law.

● Money ● Stamps ● Bonds ● Stocks

● Bank drafts ● Checks ● Passports ● Driver's licences

Caution:

This connector (A) is only intended for service purposes.

Any connection to this terminal may cause malfunctions of the machine.

Instruction for service technician:

The cable length for the service terminal has to be less than 3m (118").

The machine includes the document filing function, which stores document image data on the machine's hard disk.

Stored documents can be called up and printed or transmitted as needed. If a hard disk failure occurs, it will no

longer be possible to call up the stored document data. To prevent the loss of important documents in the unlikely

event of a hard disk failure, keep the originals of important documents or store the original data elsewhere.

With the exception of instances provided for by law, Sharp Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages

or loss due to the loss of stored document data.

"BATTERY DISPOSAL"

THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY THAT MUST BE DISPOSED

OF PROPERLY. PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SHARP DEALER OR AUTHORIZED SERVICE

REPRESENTATIVE FOR ASSISTANCE IN DISPOSING OF THIS BATTERY.

This product utilizes tin-lead solder, and a fluorescent lamp containing a small amount of mercury.

Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations.

For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance:

www.eia.org

Fusing unit

Adjuster

Lock

Release

(A)

CAUTIONS

0-4

Laser Information

Wave length 785 nm +10 nm

-15 nm

Pulse times North America: 55 cpm / 62 cpm model: (3.1 µs ± 3.1 ns)/7 mm

70 cpm model: (2.7 µs ± 2.7 ns)/7 mm

Europe: 55 cpm / 62 cpm model: (3.7 µs ± 3.7 ns)/7 mm

70 cpm model: (3.2 µs ± 3.2 ns)/7 mm

Output power Max 0.8 mW

At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.8 MILLIWATT PLUS 10 % and is maintained

constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control (APC).

Caution

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous

radiation exposure.

For North America:

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

This Digital Equipment is rated Class 1 and complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the CDRH standards. This

means that the equipment does not produce hazardous laser radiation. For your safety, observe the precautions below.

●Do not remove the cabinet, operation panel or any other covers.

●The equipment's exterior covers contain several safety interlock switches. Do not bypass any safety interlock by

inserting wedges or other items into switch slots.

For Europe:

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT

CAUTION

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION

WHEN OPEN INTERLOCKS

DEFEATED. AVOID EXPOSURE

TO BEAM.

VORSICHT

UNSICHTBARE

LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN

ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND

SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG

ÜBERBRÜCKT. NICHT DEM

STRAHL AUSSETZEN.

ADVARSEL

USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING

VED ÅBNING, NÅR

SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER

UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ

UDSAETTELSE FOR

STRÅLNING.

VAROITUS!

LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN

MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ

KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA

MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA

ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN

TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1

YLITTÄVÄLLE

NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE

LASERSÄTEILYLLE.

VARNING

OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ

ANNAT SÄTT ÄN I DENNA

BRUKSANVISNING

SPECIFICERATS, KAN

ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTAS FÖR

OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING,

SOM ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN

FÖR LASERKLASS 1.

CLASS 1

LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1

CAUTION

VORSICHT

ADVARSEL

ADVERSEL

VARNING

VARO!

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.

AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

Laserstrahl

UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND

SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERERÜCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.

USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING, NÅR SIKKERHEDSAFBRYDERE ER

UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FOR STRÅLNING.

USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES OG SIKKERHEDSLÅS BRYTES.

UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.

OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRRAR ÄR

URKOPPLADE. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN.

AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTÖNTÄ

LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.

0-5

CONTENTS

Page

OPERATION MANUALS .............................................. 0-1

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS...............................0-2

CAUTIONS...................................................................0-3

●Laser Information .................................................0-4

CONTENTS .................................................................0-5

CHAPTER 1

BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT

INTRODUCTION..........................................................1-2

MAIN FEATURES ........................................................1-3

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS................................ 1-10

●Exterior.................................................................1-10

●Interior ..................................................................1-11

●Operation panel....................................................1-13

●Touch panel.......................................................... 1-14

TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF.......................1-17

AUDITING MODE ........................................................1-18

●Using the machine when the auditing mode is

enabled.................................................................1-18

CHAPTER 2

MANAGING THE MACHINE

LOADING PAPER ........................................................2-2

●Identifying the trays ..............................................2-2

●Loading paper in paper tray 1 - tray 2 .................. 2-2

●Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 - tray 2 .. 2-3

●Loading paper in paper tray 3 ..............................2-5

●Changing the paper size in paper tray 3 .............. 2-5

●Changing the paper size in paper tray 4 .............. 2-6

●Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large

capacity tray AR-LC6)

..................................................

2-7

●Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large

capacity tray AR-LC7)

..................................................

2-8

●Loading paper in the bypass tray .........................2-10

●Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of

paper that can be used in the trays).....................2-12

●Setting the paper type and paper size.................. 2-14

●Setting the paper size when a special size is

loaded .................................................................. 2-17

SYSTEM SETTINGS ...................................................2-18

●General procedure for system settings ................2-18

●About the settings ................................................2-20

REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES ..................2-21

STORAGE OF SUPPLIES ...........................................2-22

MISFEED REMOVAL ...................................................2-23

●Misfeed removal guidance....................................2-23

●Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and

exit area................................................................2-24

●Misfeed in the duplex unit.....................................2-25

●Misfeed in the paper feed area.............................2-26

REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED.........................2-31

●Removing a misfed original from the automatic

document feeder ..................................................2-31

TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................2-32

CHAPTER 3

PERIPHERAL DEVICES

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER.............3-2

●Part names ...........................................................3-2

●Specifications .......................................................3-2

●Finishing methods ................................................3-4

●Finishing modes and finisher functions ................3-6

●Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam

removal.................................................................3-7

●Removing a misfeed .............................................3-11

●Troubleshooting finisher/saddle stitch finisher

problems...............................................................3-13

INSERTER ...................................................................3-14

●Part names ...........................................................3-14

●Specifications .......................................................3-14

●Loading paper.......................................................3-15

●Manual operation of the inserter...........................3-15

●Misfeed removal ...................................................3-17

●Troubleshooting inserter problems .......................3-18

SHARP OSA.................................................................3-19

APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MX-

AMX2)...........................................................................3-19

●Standard application setup...................................3-19

●Selecting a standard application...........................3-19

●Operation in OSA mode .......................................3-20

EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3)............3-21

●External account application setup.......................3-21

●Operation in external account mode.....................3-21

CHAPTER 4

MAKING COPIES

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER............................4-2

●Acceptable originals .............................................4-2

PLACING ORIGINALS .................................................4-3

CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED ORIGINAL.......4-5

●Manually setting the scanning size.......................4-5

STORING, DELETING, AND USING ORIGINAL

SIZES ...........................................................................4-6

●Storing or deleting an original size .......................4-6

NORMAL COPYING.....................................................4-7

●Making copies with the automatic document

feeding function ....................................................4-7

●Automatic two-sided copying using the automatic

document feeding function....................................4-10

●Copying from the document glass ........................4-11

●Automatic two-sided copying from the document

glass .....................................................................4-13

ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE....................................4-14

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM........................4-15

●Automatic selection (auto image) .........................4-15

●Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom) .........4-16

●XY ZOOM.............................................................4-18

SPECIAL PAPERS .......................................................4-20

CONTENTS

0-6

CHAPTER 5

CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS

SPECIAL MODES ........................................................5-2

●General procedure for using special functions .....5-2

●Margin shift...........................................................5-3

●Erase ....................................................................5-4

●Dual page copy.....................................................5-5

●Pamphlet copy......................................................5-6

●Job build ...............................................................5-8

●Tandem copy ........................................................5-10

●Covers/inserts.......................................................5-12

●Transparency film with insert sheets ....................5-23

●Multi shot ..............................................................5-24

●Book copy.............................................................5-26

●Tab copy ...............................................................5-27

●Card shot

.................................................................

5-29

●Mirror image .........................................................5-31

●B/W reverse..........................................................5-31

●Print menu ............................................................5-32

STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB

PROGRAMS.................................................................5-44

●Storing a job program...........................................5-44

●Calling up a job program ......................................5-45

●Deleting a stored job program ..............................5-45

INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN ...................................5-46

CHAPTER 6

MACHINE MAINTENANCE (FOR

COPYING)

USER MAINTENANCE ................................................6-2

●Cleaning the document glass and the automatic

document feeder...................................................6-2

TROUBLESHOOTING..................................................6-3

CHAPTER 7

DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION

OVERVIEW ..................................................................7-2

●Document filing function .......................................7-2

TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION ..........7-4

●A look at the operation panel................................7-4

●Saving files ...........................................................7-4

●Main screen of document filing.............................7-5

●Document filing icons ...........................................7-5

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE..........................7-6

●Quick File..............................................................7-6

●Filing.....................................................................7-7

●Print jobs ..............................................................7-9

●Scan Save ............................................................7-10

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE...............................7-13

●Searching for and calling up a saved file

..............

7-13

●Calling up and using a saved file..........................7-15

SYSTEM SETTINGS....................................................7-24

●Creating, editing, and deleting user names and

folders...................................................................7-24

ENTERING CHARACTERS .........................................7-29

TROUBLESHOOTING..................................................7-31

CHAPTER 8

SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 8-2

INDEX.......................................................................... 8-4

1-1

CHAPTER 1

BEFORE USING THE

PRODUCT

This chapter contains basic information that should be read before using

the product.

Page

INTRODUCTION..................................................................................... 1-2

MAIN FEATURES ................................................................................... 1-3

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS........................................................... 1-10

●Exterior............................................................................................ 1-10

●Interior............................................................................................. 1-11

●Operation panel............................................................................... 1-13

●Touch panel..................................................................................... 1-14

TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF.................................................. 1-17

AUDITING MODE ................................................................................... 1-18

●Using the machine when the auditing mode is enabled.................. 1-18

1-2

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing a SHARP digital multifunction copier.

Please read this manual before using the machine. In particular, be sure to read "INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS"

before using the machine.

Please keep this manual close at hand for reference whenever necessary.

This manual provides general information on using the machine, such as routine maintenance and how to load paper

and remove misfeeds. It also explains how to use the copier and document filing functions.

Separate manuals have been provided for the fax function, printer function, and network scanner function.

■Original and paper sizes

This machine allows use of standard sizes in both the AB and inch systems.

These are shown in the tables below.

■The meaning of "R" in original and paper size indications

Some original and paper sizes can be placed in either the portrait or landscape orientations. To differentiate

between landscape and portrait, the landscape orientation size indication will contain an "R". These are indicated

as A4R, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, etc. Sizes that can be placed only in the landscape orientation (A3,

B4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13") do not contain the "R" in their size indication.

Sizes in the AB system Sizes in the inch system

A3 11" x 17" (LEDGER)

B4 8-1/2" x 14" (LEGAL)

A4 8-1/2" x 13" (FOOLSCAP)

B5 8-1/2" x 11" (LETTER)

A5 7-1/4" x 10-1/2" (EXECUTIVE)

5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (INVOICE)

Size indication

with "R" Landscape

orientation

Size indication

without "R" Portrait orientation

1-3

MAIN FEATURES

The digital multifunction copier is capable of performing a variety of functions. This page shows features related to

the copy function.

●Sort mode See page 1-3

●Group mode See page 1-3

●2-sided Copy See page 1-3

●Exposure Adjustments See page 1-3

●Reduction/Enlargement See page 1-4

●XY Zoom See page 1-4

●Margin Shift See page 1-4

●Erase See page 1-4

●Dual Page Copy See page 1-4

●Pamphlet Copy See page 1-4

●Job Build See page 1-5

●Tandem Copy See page 1-5

(When using the MX-M550U, MX-M620U, or

MX-M700U, the network expansion kit is required.)

●Covers/inserts See page 1-5

●Transparency Insert See page 1-5

●Multi Shot See page 1-5

●Book Copy See page 1-5

●Tab Copy See page 1-6

●Card Shot See page 1-6

●Job programs See page 1-6

●Mirror Image See page 1-6

●B/W Reverse See page 1-6

●Date print See page 1-6

●Stamp See page 1-7

●Page numbering See page 1-7

●Text See page 1-7

●Interrupting a copy run See page 1-7

●Offset mode See page 1-7

(When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is installed.)

●Staple sort mode See page 1-7

(When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is installed.)

●Saddle stitch See page 1-8

(When the Saddle stitch finisher is installed.)

●Hole punching See page 1-8

(When the Punch Module is installed.)

●Inserter mode See page 1-8

(When the Inserter is installed.)

●Document filing function See page 1-8

Sort See page 4-9

Copies can be collated.

Group See page 4-9

Copies can be grouped by page.

2-sided Copy See pages 4-10, 4-13

Copy onto both sides of the paper using the document

glass or the automatic document feeder.

Exposure Adjustments See page 4-14

The desired image type for the original can be

selected.

Original Copy

Exposure

Text Text/Photo Photo

Resolution

ABCDE

DarkerLighter

MAIN FEATURES

1-4

Reduction / Enlargement See page 4-15

Copies can be enlarged or reduced to the desired

size.

XY Zoom See page 4-18

Separate ratio settings can be selected for the

length and width of a copy.

Margin Shift See page 5-3

Margins can be added to copies.

Erase See page 5-4

Shadows that appear around the edges of copies of

books or thick originals can be erased.

Dual Page Copy See page 5-5

The left and right pages of a book can be

successively copied onto separate sheets.

Pamphlet Copy See page 5-6

One-sided or two-sided pamphlet style copies can

be made.

Original

Enlargement Reduction

Copy

Original Copy

Image shifted

to the right Image shifted

to the left

Margin

One-sided copying

Original

Two-sided copying

Original

Image shifted

to the right

Margin

Image shifted

to the left

Margin

Original Copy

Edge erase

Centre erase

Edge+Centre

erase

CopyBook original

Finished copies are

folded in two.

Originals (one-sided)

12345678

Originals (two-sided)

Left binding

Right binding

First page

MAIN FEATURES

1-5

Job Build See page 5-8

When you have a very large number of originals, the

pages can be scanned in sets.

Tandem Copy See page 5-10

Two machines can be used to run a large copy job

in parallel.

Covers/inserts See page 5-12

Front covers, back covers, and inserts can be

added. These can also be copied on.

Transparency Insert See page 5-23

Inserts can be automatically inserted between

transparencies.

Multi Shot See page 5-24

Multiple original pages can be copied onto a

single sheet of paper in a uniform layout.

Book Copy See page 5-26

Books and other bound originals can be copied

pamphlet style.

150 sheets300 sheets 150 sheets

50 sets of

copies

100 sets of

copies

50 sets of

copies

When using the MX-M550U, MX-M620U, or

MX-M700U, the network expansion kit is required.

Front cover

Back cover

Originals

Insert sheets

Originals (1-sided)

Originals (2-sided)

Copy

Originals

(1-sided)

Originals

(2-sided) Copy

CopyOriginal

Left binding

Right binding

First page

MAIN FEATURES

1-6

Tab Copy See page 5-27

Copying is possible on the tabs of tabbed paper.

Card Shot See page 5-29

The front and back of a card can be copied onto

one sheet of paper.

This function is convenient for making copies for

certification purposes and helps save paper.

Job programs See page 5-44

Various steps of a copy operation can be stored

as a program, and up to 10 programs can be

stored. Saving frequently used sets of settings in a

program saves you the trouble of selecting those

settings each time you wish to use them.

Mirror Image See page 5-31

A mirror image copy can be made.

B/W Reverse See page 5-31

White and black can be inverted on a copy to

produce a negative image.

Date See page 5-35

The date can be added to copies.

Original Tab paper Copy

INDEX

Tab width

A4 : Maximum of 20mm (51/64")

8-1/2" x 11" : Maximum of 17mm (5/8")

Original

Example:

Portrait

A4 (8-1/2") size

Example:

Landscape

A4 (8-1/2") size

Copy

Back of

card

Front of

card

CARD CARD

CARD

JOB PROGRAMS

PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER.

RECALL

Original Copy

2010/APR/4

MAIN FEATURES

1-7

Stamp See page 5-36

Reverse text can be added to copies ("stamp").

Page numbering See page 5-37

Page numbers can be added to copies.

Text See page 5-41

Entered text can be added to copies.

Interrupting a copy run See page 5-46

A copy job in progress can be interrupted for a

rush job.

Offset mode See page 3-4

Each set of output can be offset slightly from other

sets for easy separation.

Staple sort mode See page 3-4

Sets of copies can be automatically stapled.

CONFIDENTIAL

Meeting

AUTO

AUTO A4

ORIGINAL

EXPOSUR

INTERRUPT

Offset mode Non-Offset mode

*When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is

installed.

Original

Copy

*When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is

installed.

MAIN FEATURES

1-8

Saddle stitch See page 3-5

When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, copies

can be automatically folded in half and stapled at

the fold. (Use with the pamphlet function (see

page 5-6) or book copy function (see page 5-26).)

Hole punching See page 3-5

Copies can be punched to add holes.

Inserter mode See page 3-14

Blank or already printed-on sheets of paper can

be added as a cover or an insert without being

printed on. The inserter can be used to feed heavy

sheets of paper that cannot be fed from other

trays.

Document filing function See chap. 7

A document image can be stored on the hard disk.

A stored file can easily be called up and printed or

transmitted.

Saddle stitch binding

*When the Saddle stitch finisher is installed.

Original Punch positions

*When the Punch module is installed.

Original Copy

*When the Inserter is installed.

Save to

machine's

hard disk

HDD

Document

Image

Call up a

saved file to

reuse

Printed

Transmitted

MAIN FEATURES

1-9

Energy saving features

This product has the following two power reducing modes that conform to the

Energy Star guidelines to help conserve natural resources and reduce

environmental pollution.

Preheat mode

The preheat mode is the first level of power reduction. The power is reduced

to the fuser unit a preset time after the machine has completed a job and no

further machine operations have been performed. The machine can recover

to the ready condition within a short period of time. The preset time to enter

the mode can be set by a administrator settings.

Auto power shut-off mode

The auto power shut-off mode is the second level of power reduction. In this mode power is shut off to the

fusing unit and the touch panel. In this state more energy is saved than in the preheat mode but the time to

recover to the ready condition will be longer. The preset time to enter this mode can be set by a administrator

settings.

When this product is used as a printer, and either of the above modes is active, the mode will be deactivated

automatically by an incoming job and the machine will automatically warm up and start to print when it has

reached the ready temperature.

When this product is configured for multi-function operation, and either of the above modes is active, the mode

will be deactivated as above by an incoming print job. Either mode will also be deactivated by operation of

DOCUMENT FILING, IMAGE SEND or COPY mode key.

Products that have earned

the ENERGY STAR® are

designed to protect the

environment through

superior energy efficiency.

1-10

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

Exterior

Saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16)*1 /

Finisher (AR-F15)*1 (See page 3-2)

Punch module (AR-PN4A)*1 (See page 3-2)

Inserter (AR-CF2)*1 (See page 3-14)

Automatic document feeder (See page 4-2)

This automatically feeds and scans multiple sheet

originals. Both sides of two-sided originals can be

scanned at once.

Front cover

Open to replace toner cartridge.

Operation panel

Centre tray (See page 4-9)

Finished sheets are deposited here

Bypass tray

Special papers (including transparency film) and

copy paper can be fed from the bypass tray.

Power switch (See page 1-17)

Turns the power on and off.

If the power does not come on when the power

switch is turned on, check the main power switch to

see if it is turned on.

Tray 5 (Large capacity tray(AR-LC6))*1

(See page 2-7)

Tray 5 (Large capacity tray(AR-LC7))*1

(See page 2-8)

Tray 1-Tray 2

The trays hold paper. Approximately 800 sheets of

standard A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper (80 g/m2

(20 lbs.)) can be loaded in tray 1, and

approximately 1200 sheets of standard A4 or

8-1/2" x 11" size paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) can be

loaded in tray 2.

Tray 3

Tray 3 holds paper. Approximately 500 sheets of

standard (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) paper can be loaded

in this tray. Tabbed paper and transparencies can

also be loaded.

Tray 4

Tray 4 holds paper. Approximately 500 sheets of

standard (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) paper can be loaded

in this tray.

*1 , , , and are peripheral devices. For information on these devices, see the explanations of the

devices in the manual.

(AR-F15)

12 3

10 11

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

1-11

Interior

Duplex unit

Open this cover to remove a misfeed from the

fusing unit area.

Fusing unit

Toner images are fused here.

Cover of the duplex unit

Open when a misfeed has occurred in duplex unit.

Toner cartridge*2

This holds toner for printing. The toner cartridge

must be replaced when indicated on the operation

panel.

Main power switch (See page 1-17)

Keep this switch turned on when the fax option or

Internet fax option is installed.

Right side cover

Open when a misfeed has occurred in the bypass

tray or large capacity tray.

Upper cover of large capacity tray

Open when a misfeed has occurred in the large

capacity tray.

Left side cover release

Push this knob up to open the left side cover.

Left cover of paper drawer

Open this cover to remove paper misfed in tray 3 or

tray 4.

Photoconductive drum

Images are formed on the photoconductive drum.

*2 See page 2-21 for the procedure for installing and replacing the toner cartridge.

CAUTION

The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing misfed

paper.

NOTE

Do not touch or damage the photoconductive drum.

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

1-12

■Other optional equipment

●Network expansion kit (MX-NBX1)

This kit is required to add on the network function.

When this expansion kit is installed, the machine

can be used as a network printer.

●Barcode font kit (AR-PF1)

This kit adds bar code fonts to the machine.

● Data security kit (MX-FRX5)

This kit is used to erase electronic data from the

hard disk and memory immediately after a

document is printed or transmitted.

●PS3 expansion kit (MX-PKX1)

This kit provides compatibility of PostScript level 3

to the printer.

●Facsimile expansion kit (AR-FX8)

This kit is required to add fax function.

●Additional fax memory (8 MB) (AR-MM9)

●256MB expansion memory board (AR-SM5)

This extends the memory of the machine.

●Network scanner expansion kit (MX-NSX1)

This kit is required to add the network scanning

feature.

To add the network scanner function to the

MX-M550U, MX-M620U, or MX-M700U, the

network expansion kit is required.

●Internet fax expansion kit (MX-FWX1)

This kit is required to use the Internet fax function.

To add the Internet fax function, the network

scanner expansion kit is required.

●Application integration module (MX-AMX1)

The application integration module can be

combined with the network scanner function to

append a metadata file to a scanned image file.

●

Application communication module (MX-AMX2)

This allows the machine to be linked over a network

to an external software application.

●External account module (MX-AMX3)

This is required to use an external account

application on the machine.

Peripheral devices are basically optional, but are incorporated in some models as standard equipment.

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

1-13

Operation panel

Touch panel

The machine status, messages and touch keys are

displayed on the panel. The document filing, copy,

network scanner*1, and fax*2, Internet fax*3

functions are used by switching to the screen for

the desired function. See the following page.

Mode select keys and indicators

Use to change modes and the corresponding

display on the touch panel.

[DOCUMENT FILING] key

Press to select the document filing mode. (See

page 7-5.)

[IMAGE SEND] key/LINE indicator/DATA

indicator

Press to change the display to network scanner

mode*1, fax mode*2 or Internet fax mode*3. (See

the "Operation manual (for image send)") and

"Operation manual (for facsimile)".)

[COPY] key

Press to select the copy mode.

PRINT mode indicators

READY indicator

Print data can be received when this indicator is

lit.

DATA indicator

Lights up or blinks when print data is being

received. Also lights up or blinks when printing is

being performed.

[JOB STATUS] key

Press to display the current job status. (See page

1-15.)

[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key

This is used to store, edit, and delete user names

and folder names for the document filing function,

and to configure the administrator settings and

printer configuration settings. (See page 7-24)

Numeric keys

Use to enter numeric values for various settings.

[ ] key ([LOGOUT] key)

This key is used in copy mode, document filing

mode, network scanner mode*1, fax mode*2, and

Internet fax mode*3.

[#/P] key

This is used as a program key when using the copy

function, and to dial when using the fax function*2.

[C] key (Clear key)

This key is used in copy mode, document filing

mode, network scanner mode*

, fax mode*

, and

Internet fax mode*

[START] key

Use this key to start copying in copy mode, scan a

document in network scanner mode*1, or scan a

document for transmission in fax mode*2 or

Internet fax mode*3.

[CA] key (Clear all key)

This key is used in copy mode, document filing

mode, network scanner mode*

, fax mode*

, and

Internet fax mode

. Use the key to cancel settings

and perform an operation from the initial machine

state.

*1 When the network scanner option is installed.

*2 When the fax option is installed.

*3 When the Internet fax option is installed.

LOGOUT

DOCUMENT

FILING

IMAGE SEND

COPY

JOB STATUS SYSTEM

SETTINGS

LINE

DATA

READY

DATA

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

1-14

Touch panel

The touch panel screens shown in this manual are

printed images, and may appear different from the

actual screens.

■Using the touch panel

[Example 1]

Items on the touch panel

are easily selectable by

touching the key

associated with the item

with a finger. Selection

of an item will be

accompanied with a

beep tone* to confirm

the item was selected.

Also, the key area for the item will be highlighted

for visual confirmation.

* If a greyed out key is touched, a double beep will

sound.

[Example 2]

Keys which are greyed

out on any screen are

not selectable.

The confirmation beeps can be disabled using

"Keys touch sound" in the administrator settings.

(See page 10 of the administrator settings guide.)

■Selecting a function

[Example 1]

If a key is highlighted in a

setting screen at the

time the screen appears,

the [OK] key can be

pressed to store the

selection without further

operation.

[Example 2]

A function in the special

functions screen is

selected by touching the

key so that it is

highlighted. To cancel

the selection, touch the

highlighted key once

again.

[Example 3]

A corresponding icon

representing the feature

will appear on the touch

key and on the main

screen of the mode

selected. If this icon is

touched, the setting

screen of the function (or

a menu screen) will

appear, allowing the settings to be checked or

adjusted and the function to be cancelled easily.

JOB QUEUE

COPY

001

0666211221

003 / 000

010 / 000

SETS / PROG

Beep

tone

1/13 COMPLETE

Copier feature

●Dual page copy

●Job build

●Tandem copy

●Mirror image

●B/W Reverse

OCK ONTO

PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS

PAPER IS FED

FROM INSERTER

YES NO

CANCEL OK

DUAL PAGE

COPY

TANDEM

COPY

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

SPECIAL MODES ORIGI

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

QUICK FILE

FILE

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

1-15

■Job status screen (common to print, scan, fax and Internet fax)

This screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed.

This screen can be used to display the "JOB QUEUE" (showing stored jobs and the current job) or the

"COMPLETE" job list (showing finished jobs). This screen is used to check jobs, move a job to the top of the JOB

QUEUE, or delete a job.

Job list

The displayed jobs in the job list are themselves

operation keys. To cancel printing or to give a job

the highest print priority, touch the relevant job key

to select the job and execute the desired operation

using the keys described in and .

This shows the current job and the jobs waiting to

be run. The icons to the left of the jobs in the

queue show the job mode. The document filing

reprint job icon is highlighted.

Note that the icon does not become highlighted

during retransmission of a fax/image transmission

job.

*1 "PAPER EMPTY" in the job status display

When a job status display indicates "PAPER

EMPTY", the specified paper size for the job is not

loaded in any of the trays.

In this case, the job will be suspended until the

required paper is loaded. Other stored jobs will be

printed (if possible) until the required paper is loaded.

(Other jobs will not be printed if the paper runs out

during printing.) If you need to change the paper size

because the specified paper size is not available,

touch the current job key to select it and then touch

the [DETAIL] key described in .

Mode select key

This switches the job list display between "JOB

QUEUE" and "COMPLETE".

"JOB QUEUE": Shows stored jobs and the job in

progress.

"COMPLETE": Shows finished jobs.

Files saved using the "FILE" and "QUICK FILE"

functions and finished broadcast transmission

jobs appear as keys in the finished job screen.

The "FILE" or "QUICK FILE" job keys in the

finished job screen can be touched, followed by

the [CALL] key, to call up a finished job and print

or transmit it. A finished broadcast transmission

job key can be touched followed by the [DETAIL]

key to check the result of the transmission.

JOB QUEUE

COPY

Suzuki

066211221

STATUS

020 / 001

020 / 000

002 / 000

PRINT JOB SCAN TO

FAX JOB

INTERNET-FAX INTERNET-FAX

JOB QUEUE

COMPLETE

JOB QUEUE

COMPLETE

DETAIL

PRIORITY

STOP/DELETE

DETAIL

CALL

PAPER EMPTY

WAITING

1/1

SETS / PROGRESS

COPYING

"JOB QUEUE" screen "COMPLETE"

job screen

8 9

Print mode Copy mode

Scan to e-mail job

Scan to FTP job

Scan to Desktop job

Scan to Network folder job

Fax send job Fax reception job

PC-Fax send job

i-Fax send job

i-Fax reception job

PC-Internet Fax send job

Internet Fax mode

SCAN mode

Fax mode

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

1-16

[PRINT JOB] key

This displays the print job list of print mode

(copying, printing, fax reception, Internet fax

reception, and self printing).

[SCAN TO] key

This displays the transmission status and finished

jobs of scan mode (Scan to e-mail, Scan to FTP,

Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder)

when the network scanner option is installed.

[FAX JOB] key

This displays the transmission/reception status

and finished jobs of fax mode (fax and PC-Fax)

when the fax option is installed.

Display switching keys

Use to switch the page of the displayed job list.

[INTERNET-FAX] key

This displays the transmission/reception status

and finished jobs of Internet fax mode and PC

Internet fax mode when the Internet fax option is

installed.

[STOP/DELETE] key

Use to cancel or delete the current job or delete

the selected reserved job. Note that printing of

received faxes and received Internet faxes cannot

be cancelled or deleted.

[PRIORITY] key

A stored job in the "JOB QUEUE" job list can be

printed ahead of all other stored jobs by selecting

the job and then touching this key.

[DETAIL] key

This shows detailed information on the selected

job.

Files saved using the "FILE" and "QUICK

FILE" functions and finished broadcast

transmission jobs

appear as keys in the finished

job screen. A Quick File in the finished job screen

or the [Filing] key can be touched, followed by the

[CALL] key, to call up a finished job and print or

transmit it. A finished broadcast transmission job

key can be touched followed by the [DETAIL] key to

check the result of the transmission.

[CALL] key

When this key is touched after selecting a job in

the COMPLETE job status screen (a job stored

using the FILE or QUICK FILE keys of the

document filing function), the "JOB SETTINGS"

menu screen appears to let you resend or reprint

the finished job. (See "Document filing function"

on page 7-2.)

1-17

TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF

The machine has two power switches. The main power switch can be found at the upper right after the front cover

is opened. The power switch is located at the upper left of the right side of the machine.

The two switches are normally used as follows:

Main power switch: Normally kept in the ON position.

(Be sure to keep ON when using the

fax function.)

Power switch : Turn to ON position before using

the machine.

Turn OFF at night when the

machine is not used.

Main power switch ON, Power switch ON

The copy, printer, fax*, Internet fax*, network

scanner*, and document filing functions can be

used. If the machine is not used for a certain interval

after turning on the power switch, the machine will

automatically enter a reduced power consumption

state (preheat mode or auto power shut-off mode

(see page 1-9)).

* The required options must be installed to use

these functions.

Main power switch OFF, Power switch ON

The copy, printer, fax, Internet fax, network scanner,

and document filing functions cannot be used.

Power switch

Main power switch

"OFF" position

"ON" position

CAUTION

Before turning off the main power switch, make sure

that the communication and data lights are not

blinking on the operation panel. Turning off the main

power switch or unplugging the power cord while the

lights are blinking may damage the hard disk and

cause the data being stored or received to be lost.

Main power switch ON, Power switch OFF

Set the switches in this way at night or at other times

when the machine is not being used. The touch

panel cannot be used, however, the following

functions will remain operational:

When the fax option is installed:

Automatic fax reception, timer transmission

(automatic transmission at a specified time), and

transmission when a polling request is received from

another machine (remote transmission, relay

broadcast transmission)

When the Internet fax option is installed:

Automatic Internet fax reception

Main power switch OFF, Power switch OFF

The copy, printer, fax, Internet fax, network scanner,

and document filing functions cannot be used.

Turn both switches off and unplug the power cord if

you suspect a machine failure, if there is a bad

thunderstorm nearby, or when you are moving the

machine.

1-18

AUDITING MODE

Auditing mode can be enabled to keep track of the number of pages printed and transmitted (scanned) by each

account (up to 500 accounts can be established). The page counts can be viewed and totaled as needed.

<This mode is enabled in the administrator settings separately for the copy, printer, fax, Internet fax, network scanner,

and document filing functions (page 7 of the administrator settings guide)>

Using the machine when the auditing mode is enabled

The procedure for making copies when auditing mode has been enabled for the copy function is explained below.

When the account counter is turned on, the right

message appears on the touch panel.

When the above screen appears, enter your 5-digit account number and then begin the copying procedure.

1Enter your account number (5 digits) with

the numeric keys.

As you enter your

account number, the

hyphens (-) change to

asterisks ( ). If you

enter an incorrect digit,

press the key and

re-enter the correct digit.

When a correct account number is entered, the

following message will appear.

If a limit has been set in the administrator settings

for the number of copies that can be made by the

account, the remaining number that can be made

is displayed.

Check the number in the display and touch the

[OK] key.

2Follow the appropriate steps to perform

the copy job.

When copying is begun, the following message

will appear.

To perform an interrupt copy job (page 5-46),

touch the [INTERRUPT] key and then enter your

account number as explained in step 1. The

following message will appear.

3When the copy job is finished, press the

[ ] key ([LOGOUT] key)

NOTES

●When auditing mode is enabled for document filing and fax/image transmission, a message will appear asking

you to enter your account number each time you switch to the main screen of one of those functions in the touch

panel. Enter your account number in the same way as for copy mode, and then begin the scanning procedure.

●When the account counter is turned on for the printer function, you must enter your account number in the setting

screen of the printer driver on your computer in order to print.

ENTER YOUR ACCOUNT NUMBER.

NOTE

If "ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY" is enabled in the

administrator settings and an incorrect account

number is entered three times in a row, "PLEASE SEE

YOUR ADMINISTRATOR FOR ASSISTANCE." will

appear (page 8 of the administrator settings guide).

Operation is not possible while this message

appears (about one minute).

LOGOUT

ACCOUNT STATUS :MADE /REMAINING

COPIES :00,123,000/00,012,456

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

PRESS [LOGOUT] WHEN FINISHED.

COPY INTERRUPT MODE.

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

LOGOUT

2-1

CHAPTER 2

MANAGING THE MACHINE

This chapter explains how to load paper, replace the toner cartridge, and

remove paper misfeeds. It also contains information about supplies.

Page

LOADING PAPER ................................................................................... 2-2

●Identifying the trays ......................................................................... 2-2

●Loading paper in paper tray 1 - tray 2 ............................................. 2-2

●Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 - tray 2 ............................. 2-3

●Loading paper in paper tray 3 ......................................................... 2-5

●Changing the paper size in paper tray 3 ......................................... 2-5

●Changing the paper size in paper tray 4 ......................................... 2-6

●

Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray AR-LC6)

... 2-7

●

Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray AR-LC7)

... 2-8

●Loading paper in the bypass tray .................................................... 2-10

●Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of paper that can be

used in the trays)............................................................................. 2-12

●Setting the paper type and paper size ............................................ 2-14

●Setting the paper size when a special size is loaded...................... 2-17

SYSTEM SETTINGS .............................................................................. 2-18

●General procedure for system settings ........................................... 2-18

●About the settings ........................................................................... 2-20

REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES ............................................. 2-21

STORAGE OF SUPPLIES ...................................................................... 2-22

MISFEED REMOVAL.............................................................................. 2-23

●Misfeed removal guidance .............................................................. 2-23

●Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and exit area................ 2-24

●Misfeed in the duplex unit................................................................ 2-25

●Misfeed in the paper feed area........................................................ 2-26

REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED ................................................... 2-31

●Removing a misfed original from the automatic document feeder .. 2-31

TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................ 2-32

2-2

LOADING PAPER

If the paper runs out during printing, a message will appear in the display.

Follow the procedure below to load paper.

Identifying the trays

The trays are identified using numbers as shown below.

For the types and sizes of paper that can be used in each tray, see page 2-12.

Loading paper in paper tray 1 - tray 2

A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper can be loaded in tray 1. A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper can be loaded in tray 2. These

are parallel large-capacity trays that allow a total of approximately 2000 sheets of SHARP standard paper (80 g/m2

(20 lbs.)) to be loaded. If you wish to change the paper size of tray 1 or tray 2, see "Changing the paper size in paper

tray 1 - tray 2" on the next page.

1Pull out paper tray 1-tray 2.

Gently pull the tray out

until it stops.

2Load paper in the left and right trays.

Lift the paper guide and

load paper in tray 1.*1

Approximately 800 sheets

of SHARP standard paper

(80 g/m2 (20 lbs.))

can be

loaded.

Be sure to return the

paper guide to its

original position after

loading the paper.

Load paper in tray 2.*

Approximately 1200

sheets of SHARP

standard paper

(80 g/m2

(20 lbs.))

can be loaded.

*1 The paper stack must not be higher than the indicator line.

Tray 1

This is the left large capacity tray.

Tray 3

Tray 4

Tray 2

This is the right large capacity tray.

Tray 5

This is an optional large capacity tray.

Bypass tray

NOTES

●Do not use curled or folded paper. Doing so may cause a misfeed.

●Do not place heavy objects or press hard on any tray which is pulled out.

●Do not place objects on the large-capacity tray. This may damage the tray or interfere with operation.

●Load paper with the print side face up. However, when the paper type is set to "PRE-PRINTED" or "LETTER

HEAD", load the paper face down*.

* If the two-sided function is disabled using "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the administrator settings (page 11

of the administrator settings guide), load the paper face up.

Indicator line

LOADING PAPER

2-3

3Gently push tray 1-tray 2 into the machine.

Push the tray firmly all

the way into the

machine.

4Set the paper type.

If the paper size was changed from an AB size to an

inch size, or from an inch size to an AB size, or if the

paper type was changed, be sure to change the

appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the

paper type and paper size" (See page 2-14).

5Loading paper in paper tray 1/tray 2 is now

complete.

Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 - tray 2

To change the paper size of tray 1 - tray 2, follow the steps below.

This section only explains how to change the paper size. For the procedures for opening/closing the tray and loading

paper, see "Loading paper in paper tray 1 - tray 2" (page 2-2).

To have the paper size of tray 1 changed to B5, or to have the paper size of tray 1 changed from B5 to another size,

consult your dealer or nearest authorised service representative. (Only a service technician can change the paper

size in this case.)

1Remove the paper size guide.

With the base of the tray pressed all the way down,

hold down the hook at the bottom on the paper

size guide and pull the paper size guide up slightly.

2Adjust the paper size guide to the paper

size to be used.

Paper sizes are inscribed at the slot (A) on the

bottom of the tray and at the hole (B) at the top of

the paper size guide. ("LT" indicates 8-1/2" x 11"

size.)

Align the bottom of the paper size guide with the

slot, and align the hole at the top with the locking

tab.

NOTES

●Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press

down on the tray.

●Before changing the paper size of tray 1, raise the

paper guide.

Hook

Tray 1 Tray 2

Paper guide

NOTES

●When attaching the paper size guide, make sure

that the top and bottom of the guide are aligned to

the same paper size.

●If the top and bottom of the paper size guide are not

aligned to the same paper size, skewed feeding

and misfeeds will result.

(A) (B)

LOADING PAPER

2-4

3Push in the paper guide so that it locks

into place.

Push the paper size guide in until the hook at the

bottom locks into place. (You will hear a "click"

when the hook locks.) Move the paper size guide

slightly to verify that it has locked into place.

4Repeat steps 1 to 3 to adjust the far paper

guide to the paper size to be used.

Be sure to adjust the far paper guide to the same

size as the near paper guide.

5Set the paper type and paper size.

For the procedure for configuring these settings,

see "Setting the paper type and paper size" (page

2-14).

An incorrect paper type or paper size setting may

cause automatic selection of the wrong type or

size of paper, and result in a misfeed or otherwise

prevent printing.

NOTES

●When removing and attaching the far paper size

guide, take care not to hit the front cover of the

machine.

●Adjust both the front and back guides. If only one

guide is adjusted, skewed feeding and misfeeds

may result.

LOADING PAPER

2-5

Loading paper in paper tray 3

Approximately 500 sheets of standard paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) from A3 to A5R size (11" x 17" to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)

can be loaded in tray 3. Special papers such as tabbed paper and transparency film can also be loaded. For

information on what special papers can be used, see "Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of paper that

can be used in the trays)" on page 2-12. To load tabbed paper or transparency film, see "Loading tabbed paper" or

"Loading transparency film" on the next page.

1Pull out paper tray 3.

Gently pull the tray out

until it stops.

2Load paper into the tray.

The paper stack must not

be higher than the

indicator line (no more

than 500 sheets of

SHARP standard paper

(80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)

To change the paper

size, see "Changing the paper size in paper tray 3"

below.

3Gently push tray 3 into the machine.

Push the tray firmly all

the way into the

machine.

4Set the paper type.

If the paper size was changed from an AB size to an

inch size, or from an inch size to an AB size, or if the

paper type was changed, be sure to change the

appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the

paper type and paper size" (see page 2-14).

5Loading paper in paper tray 3 is now

complete.

Changing the paper size in paper tray 3

1Pull out paper tray 3.

If paper remains in the tray, remove it.

2Adjust the guide plates A and B by

squeezing their lock levers and sliding

them to the paper size to be loaded.

The guide plates A and

B are slidable. Adjust

them to the paper size to

be loaded while

squeezing their lock

levers.

3Load paper into the tray.

4Gently push tray 3 into the machine.

Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.

5Set the paper type of the paper that was

loaded in tray 3.

Be sure to change the appropriate settings as

explained in "Setting the paper type and paper size"

(see page 2-14).

If you changed the paper size, be sure to change

the paper size setting. An incorrect paper size

setting will cause the wrong paper to be

automatically selected and may prevent printing or

cause misfeeds.

6Changing the paper size in paper tray 3 is

now complete.

LOADING PAPER

2-6

■Loading tabbed paper

When using tabbed paper, follow the steps below to attach the special guide to the divider plate at the bottom

edge of the tabbed paper. (Tabbed paper cannot be used in tray 4.)

1Take out the tabbed paper guide.

The guide is stored

inside the left side of the

machine as shown.

Be sure to replace the

guide when you have

finished using it.

2Pull out the tray and attach the guide.

Slide the divider plate to

the position of the

bottom edge of the

tabbed paper and attach

the guide so that it

covers the divider plate.

3Place the tabbed paper in the tray.

Place the tabbed paper

with the print side face

up.

[Example]

Make sure that the positions of the tabs correspond

with the originals as shown below.

4Gently push the tray in and set the paper

type to tabbed paper.

(See "Setting the paper type and paper size" on

page 2-14)

■Loading transparency film

Be sure to load transparency film with the label facing down and the film oriented vertically. Smudging and a

dirty image may result if the film is loaded with the label facing up. (Transparency film cannot be used in tray 4.)

Changing the paper size in paper tray 4

Plain paper from A3 to B5 size (11" x 17" to 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R) can be loaded in tray 4. For paper that can be used,

see "Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of paper that can be used in the trays)" on page 2-12.

The procedures for loading paper in tray 4 and changing the paper size are the same as for tray 3 (see page 2-5).

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

Front side

1st page 1st page

2nd page

3rd page

3rd page 4th page

4th page

Tabbed paper

Original

NOTE

When referring to the explanations of tray 3, keep in mind that special papers such as tabbed paper and

transparency film cannot be used in tray 4. Use tray 3 for special paper.

LOADING PAPER

2-7

Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray

AR-LC6)

The large capacity tray can hold up to 3,500 sheets of A4 size (8-1/2" x 11") SHARP standard paper (80 g/m2

(20 lbs.)). If you wish to change the paper size, please consult your dealer (the paper size must be changed by a

service technician).

1Pull the tray out until it stops.

When the tray is in

operation, do not use

excessive force to pull

the tray out. This may

damage the tray.

2Place the paper in the centre of the paper

table.

The paper stack must

not be higher than the

indicator line (up to

3,500 sheets of SHARP

standard paper (80 g/m2

(20 lbs.))

If the paper type was

changed, be sure to change the appropriate

settings as explained in "Setting the paper type

and paper size" (See page 2-14).

3Push the tray firmly all the way into the

machine.

The paper table will

automatically rise to the

paper feed position.

■Specifications

Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.

Name Large capacity tray (AR-LC6)

Paper size A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

Paper weight 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs.)

Paper capacity (plain) 3500 sheets (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.))

Dimensions 376 mm (W) x 546 mm (D) x 518 mm (H)

(14-23/32" (W) x 21-1/2" (D) x 20-13/32" (H))

Power supply Supplied from the main unit

Weight Approximately 28.5 kg (62.9 lbs.)

Overall dimensions when

attached to machine

1347 mm (W) x 679 mm (D)

(53-3/64" (W) x 26-47/64" (D))

LOADING PAPER

2-8

Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray

AR-LC7)

An optional large capacity tray (AR-LC7) is available for the machine. The AR-LC7 can hold up to 3000 sheets of

80 g/m2 (20 lbs.) paper. (See the following "Specifications" for the types of paper that can be used in the large

capacity tray.)

When installed, the AR-LC7 operates as "Tray 5". The AR-LC7 cannot be used together with the AR-LC6 described

on page 2-7.

■Part names

■Specifications

* The indicated sizes of plain paper can be used.

When using the AR-LC7, refer also to "More

information on plain paper" on page 2-13.

Specifications are subject to change for improvement

without notice.

NOTES

●If you wish to change the paper size, please consult

your dealer (the paper size must be changed by a

service technician).

●Do not use curled or folded paper. This may cause

misfeeds.

●When the tray has been pulled out, do not place

heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.

●Do not place any objects on the large capacity tray

or use it instead of a chair or step. This may

damage the tray and interfere with the use of the

bypass tray.

Operation button /

Indicator

To load paper in the tray,

press this button, wait until

the indicator turns off, and

then pull the tray out.

Top cover

Open this cover to

remove a misfeed.

Paper size display

●Load paper in the tray with the print side face up.

However, if the paper type is "PRE-PRINTED" or

"LETTER HEAD", load the paper with the print side

face down*.

* If the two-sided function is disabled using

"DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the administrator

settings (page 11 of the administrator settings

guide), load the paper face up.

Name Large capacity tray (AR-LC7)

Paper sizes* A3 (11" x 17"), B4 (8-1/2" x 14"),

A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)

Paper weight 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to

28 lbs.)

Number of

paper trays

/Paper capacity

One tray 3000 sheets (80 g/m2 or

20 lbs.)

Power supply Supplied from the machine

Dimensions 690mm (W) x 587mm (D) x 521.5mm

(H) (27-5/32" (W) x 23-7/64" (D) x

20-17/32" (H))

Weight Approx. 50 kg (Approx. 110 lbs.)

LOADING PAPER

2-9

■Loading paper in the AR-LC7

If the paper runs out during printing, a message will appear in the display. Follow the procedure below to load

paper.

1Pull the tray out until it stops.

Pull the finger grip up

and pull the tray out

until it stops.

2Place the paper on the paper table.

The paper stack must

not be higher than the

indicator line.

When the paper tray is

pulled out, the paper

table will have

descended to a

position where

approximately 500 sheets of A4 size (8-1/2" x 11")

80 g/m2 (20 lbs.) paper can be placed. After the

paper is placed, the paper table will descend to a

position where an additional approximately 500

sheets can be placed. When the paper table has

descended all the way, approximately 3000 sheets

can be held.

If a different type of paper is loaded that was used

previously, the paper settings for tray 5 must be

changed on the machine. Be sure to change to the

appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the

paper type and paper size" on page 2-14.

3Push the tray firmly all the way into the

machine.

After the tray is pushed

in, the indicator will

blink until the paper

table finishes

ascending and then

light solidly.

NOTE

To add or change paper, press the operation button.

When the button is

pressed, the indicator

will blink until the paper

table stops descending.

Do not pull the tray out

until the indicator turns

off. Attempting to pull

the tray out when the indicator is blinking or solidly lit

may damage the tray.

Indicator

line

CAUTION

When loading paper, take care not to insert your

hands into holes on paper table.

NOTES

Do not insert objects in

the tray or attempt to

place spare paper in

the tray. This may

damage the tray.

●Use SHARP-recommended paper (page 2-22).

Special paper cannot be used.

Do not insert your

hands here.

LOADING PAPER

2-10

Loading paper in the bypass tray

The bypass tray can be used to print on plain paper, postcards, label sheets, tabbed paper, and other special papers.

When using SHARP standard paper, up to 100 sheets can be loaded (up to 20 postcards) for continuous printing

similar to the other trays. For the paper types that can be used in the bypass tray, see "Specifications of paper trays

(Types and sizes of paper that can be used in the trays)" on page 2-12.

1Open the bypass tray.

When loading A3, B4,

A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x

14", 8-1/2" x 13" or

8-1/2" x 11"R size paper,

be sure to pull the

auxiliary tray all the way

out. If the auxiliary tray is

not pulled all the way out, the size of the loaded

paper will not be correctly displayed.

2Set the bypass tray guides to the width of

the copy paper.

3Insert the copy paper all the way into the

bypass tray. (Do not force the paper in.)

Place the copy paper

face up. If the bypass

tray guides are set wider

than the copy paper, the

inside of the machine

may become soiled,

resulting in smudges on

succeeding copies. A gap may cause skewing

or wrinkling.

4Set the type and size of the paper loaded in

the bypass tray.

If the paper size was changed from an AB size to an

inch size, or from an inch size to an AB size, or if the

paper type was changed, be sure to change the

appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the

paper type and paper size" (see page 2-14).

5This completes the procedure for loading

paper in the bypass tray.

■

Loading tabbed paper in the bypass

tray

[Example]

Make sure that the positions of the tabs correspond

with the originals as shown below.

Place the tabbed paper face up.

NOTE

After loading the paper in the bypass tray, be sure to set the paper type and size (step 4) if these were changed.

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

Front side

1st page 1st page

2nd page

3rd page

3rd page 4th page

4th page

Tabbed paper

Original

Front

LOADING PAPER

2-11

■Important points when using the

bypass tray

●Be sure to load A5 paper, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" paper,

and postcards as shown (1) horizontal loading in

the diagram below.

(1):Horizontal loading

(2):Vertical loading

●When loading plain paper other than SHARP

standard paper, special media other than

postcards, SHARP-recommended transparency

film, or paper to be printed on the back, the

paper must be loaded one sheet at a time.

Loading more than one sheet at a time will cause

misfeeds.

●Before loading heavy paper, straighten any

curling in the paper.

●When adding paper, remove any paper

remaining in the tray, combine it with the paper to

be added, and reload as a single stack.

●Do not use paper that has already been printed

on by a plain paper fax machine or a laser

printer. This may cause printed images to

become dirty.

●When printing on transparency film, be sure to

remove each sheet as it exits the machine.

Allowing sheets to stack in the output tray may

cause curling.

●Use only Sharp-recommended transparency

film. Transparency film should be loaded in the

bypass tray with the label facing down and the

film oriented vertically. Smudging and a dirty

image may result if the film is placed with the

label facing up.

●When loading multiple sheets of transparency

film in the bypass tray, be sure to fan the sheets

several times before loading.

●Use only tabbed sheets that are made of paper.

Tabbed sheets made of film or other material

cannot be used.

(1) (2)

Label facing down

LOADING PAPER

2-12

Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of paper that

can be used in the trays)

The specifications for the types and sizes of paper that can be loaded in the paper trays are shown below.

Tray No.

(tray name) Applicable paper types Applicable paper sizes Paper weight

Tray 1

Plain paper (Refer to the next page

"More information on plain paper".)

A4, 8-1/2" x 11" 60 to 105 g/m2

(16 to 28 lbs.)

Tray 2 A4, 8-1/2" x 11"

Tray 3

Plain paper

(Refer to the next page "More

information on plain paper".)

• When "AUTO-AB" is selected in "Setting

the paper type and paper size" (page

2-14), the following paper sizes can be

automatically detected:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8-1/2" x 13"

• When "AUTO-INCH" is selected in "Setting the

paper type and paper size" (page 2-14), the

following paper sizes can be automatically detected:

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2"

x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R

• Non-standard sizes

60 to 128 g/m2

(16 to 34 lbs.)

Special paper

(Refer to the

next page "More

information on

special media

that can be

used".)

• Heavy paper

• Transparency

film

• Labels

• Tabbed paper

• When "AUTO-AB" is selected in "Setting

the paper type and paper size" (page

2-14), the following paper sizes can be

automatically detected:

A4, A4R, B5, B5R (only A4 for tabbed paper)

• When "AUTO-INCH" is selected in "Setting the

paper type and paper size" (page 2-14), the

following paper sizes can be automatically detected:

8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R (only 8-1/2" x 11" for

tabbed paper)

• Non-standard sizes smaller than A4 or

8-1/2" x 11"

• 40 sheets of transparency film can be loaded

• Tabbed paper can be used

See the remarks

for special papers

on the following

page.

Tray 4

Plain paper (Refer to the next

page "More information on plain

paper".)

• When "AUTO-AB" is selected in "Setting

the paper type and paper size" (page

2-14), the following paper sizes can be

automatically detected:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 13"

• When "AUTO-INCH" is selected in "Setting

the paper type and paper size" (page

2-14), the following paper sizes can be

automatically detected:

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x

11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R

• Non-standard sizes

60 to 128 g/m2

(16 to 34 lbs.)

Bypass tray

Same as tray 3. Postcards can also be used.

However,

• Up to 100 sheets of plain paper can be loaded.

• Up to 20 sheets of transparency film can be loaded.

• Up to 20 postcards can be loaded.

The same paper as

tray 3, and also 52

to 59

(14 lbs.

to 15 lbs.) thin

paper can be used.

Tray 5

(AR-LC6) Same as tray 2.

Tray 5

(AR-LC7)

Plain paper (Refer to the next page

"More information on plain paper".)

A3, B4, A4, A4R,

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",

8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R

60 to 105 g/m2

(16 to 28 lbs.)

LOADING PAPER

2-13

■More information on plain paper

Incorrect feeding may result in poor toner fusing (the toner does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed

off), skewed feeding, misfeeds, or other failures.

■More information on special media that can be used

Incorrect feeding may result in poor toner fusing (the toner does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed

off), skewed feeding, misfeeds, or other failures.

■Paper that can be used for automatic two-sided printing

Paper used for automatic two-sided printing (paper that can be fed through the duplex module) must meet the

following conditions:

Paper type :Plain paper as specified on page above.

Paper size :Must be one of the following standard sizes: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R or A5R (11" x 17",

8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)

Paper weight :64 to 128 g/m2 (16 to 34 lbs.)(special heavy papers indicated in the table above)

Paper in AB system Paper in inch system

A5 to A3 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 11" x 17"

Plain

paper

SHARP standard paper

(See page 2-22) 64 g/m2 (17 lbs.)

Restrictions on paper

other than SHARP

standard paper

60 to 105 g/m2 or 16 to 28 lbs.

Recycled, coloured, pre-punched, pre-printed and letterhead papers must conform to the same conditions

as above.

Type Remar k s

Special

paper

Heavy paper

• For A5 to A4 or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 8-1/2" x 11" sizes, heavy paper ranging

from 106 to 128 g/m2 or 16 to 34 lbs. can be used.

• Other heavy papers

176 g/m2 (65 lbs.) can be used.

200 to 205 g/m2 (110 lbs.) can be used but only for A4, 8-1/2" x 11" paper

in the portrait orientation.

• For A5 or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" paper, the orientation must be landscape.

Transparency film,

Tabbed paper

• Use SHARP recommended paper.

• Use only tabbed sheets that are made of paper. (Tabbed sheets made of

film or other material cannot be used.)

Postcards • Japanese official postcards can be used.

NOTES

●Special papers (explained above) cannot be used for automatic two-sided printing. However, certain special

heavy papers (index paper, cover paper) can be used.

●Various types of plain paper and special paper are sold. Some of these cannot be used in the machine. Please

consult your retailer or your dealer when buying paper.

●The image quality and toner fusibility of special papers may change due to ambient conditions, operating

conditions, and paper characteristics, resulting in image quality inferior to that of SHARP standard paper.

LOADING PAPER

2-14

Setting the paper type and paper size

Follow these steps to change the paper type setting when the paper type has been changed in a paper tray. For the

paper types that can be used in each tray, see page 2-12.

1Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

The system setting

menu screen will

appear.

2Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.

The paper tray selection

screen will appear.

3Touch the [TRAY SETTINGS] key.

4Display the setting screen of the desired

paper tray.

Touch the key or key to display the

setting screen of the desired paper tray.

5Touch the [TYPE / SIZE] key.

6Select the type of paper that was loaded in

the tray.

Example: The paper type of tray 3 is selected

Touch the desired paper type to select it. The

paper size setting screen will appear.

7Select the size of paper that was loaded in

the tray.

Touch the appropriate keys (checkboxes).

NOTE

To automatically switch to a tray with the same size

and type of paper (if there is one) in the event that the

paper tray runs out of paper, display the last screen

with the key and select [AUTO TRAY

SWITCHING].

JOB STATUS SYSTEM

SETTINGS

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

ATA

ORWARD

RINT

PRINTER

CONDITION

TRAY SETTINGS

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

1/8

PLAIN / A4

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

TYPE / SIZE

SYSTEM SETTINGS

TRAY 1

FAX I-FAX

COPY

DOC.

FILING

FIXED PAPER SIDE

DISABLE DUPLEX

DISABLE STAPLE

DISABLE PUNCH

NOTES

●Tabbed paper can only be used in tray 3, bypass

tray and the inserter.

●Heavy paper, label sheets, and transparency film

cannot be loaded in trays 1, 2, 4, and 5.

[AUTO-INCH

] key : Select when you have

loaded an inch-based size

of paper.

[AUTO-AB] key : Select when you have

loaded an AB size of paper.

[SIZE INPUT] key : Select to directly enter a

paper size (see page 2-17).

[NON STANDARD SIZE] checkbox :

Select when you have

loaded a non-standard size

of paper (see page 2-17).

TYPE / SIZE

TRAY 3

PER TRAY SETTINGS

COPY

I-FAX DOC.

FILING

FAX

PLAIN / A4

CANCEL

1/2

PLAIN

RECYCLED

PRE-PRINTED PRE-PUNCHED

LETTER HEAD

COLOUR

HEAVY PAPER TAB PAPER

LABELS

TRANSPARENCY

TRAY 3 TYPE/SIZE SETTING

SELECT THE PAPER TYPE.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

1/2

11X17,8 X14,8 X11

8 X11R,7 X10 ,5 X8 R

2 1

4 1

2 1

A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5

B5R,216X330(8 X13)

TYPE OK

PLAIN

TRAY3 TYPE/SIZE SETTING

SYSTEM SETTINGS

TYPE

AUTO-INCH

SIZE INPUT

AUTO-AB

SIZE

X420 Y297 NON STANDARD

SIZE 2/2

LOADING PAPER

2-15

8Touch the [OK] key in the size setting

screen.

You will return to the tray setting screen of step 4.

9Select output functions that can be used

with the selected tray.

Touch the checkboxes

under the desired items

to select them.

■User type

Select a "User type" when the name of the paper

type does not appear in the selections or when you

wish to select the tray attributes yourself.

Touch the key in step 5 on the previous page

to display the user type selection screen and then

select a user type.

Configure paper settings for each tray and

then touch the [OK] key to exit.

NOTE

Sizes that can be selected vary depending on the

selected paper type.

NOTE

When the inserter (option) is selected, printing of

faxes and Internet faxes is not possible.

PRINT COPY FAX I-FAX DOC.

FILING

NOTE

The size and type of paper loaded in the bypass tray

can also be set from the paper setting screen. Touch

the [PAPER SELECT] key in the main screen to

display the paper selection screen, and then touch

the [PAPER SELECT] key of the bypass tray and go

to step 5.

SYSTEM

SETTINGS

TRAY 3 TYPE/SIZE SETTING

2/2

USER TYPE 1

CANCEL

SELECT THE PAPER TYPE

USER TYPE 5

USER TYPE 2

USER TYPE 6

USER TYPE 3

USER TYPE 7

USER TYPE 4

1/2

LOADING PAPER

2-16

■Programming and editing paper types

To program or edit the name of a paper type or set paper attributes, follow the steps below.

1Touch the [PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION]

key.

2Select the paper type that you wish to

program or edit.

3Touch the [TYPE NAME] key.

A character entry screen appears. Enter up to 14

characters. Refer to page 7-29 for the procedure

for entering characters.

4Set the paper attributes.

Touch the checkboxes to the left of the items to

select them.

FIXED PAPER SIDE:

Select this checkbox when paper is to be loaded

print side down in the tray. Make sure a checkmark

does not appear when paper is to be loaded print

side up.

• If the two-sided function is disabled using

"DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the administrator

settings (page 11 of the administrator settings

guide), load the paper face up.

DISABLE DUPLEX:

Prohibits two-sided printing. Enable when the

backside of the paper cannot be printed on.

DISABLE STAPLE:

Prohibits stapling. Enable when using special

papers such as transparency film and label

sheets.

DISABLE PUNCH:

Prohibits punching. Enable when using special

papers such as transparency film and label

sheets.

Touch the [EXIT] key to exit the

programming/editing procedure.

PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION

SYSTEM

SETTINGS

PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION

USER TYPE 1

SELECT THE PAPER TYPE TO EDIT.

USER TYPE 5

USER TYPE 2

USER TYPE 6

USER

FIXED PAPER SIDE

TYPE NAME

PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION

No.01

USER TYPE 1

DISABLE STAPLE

DISABLE DUPLEX

DISABLE PUNCH

EXITCANCEL

NOTES

●Tray attributes depend on the selected paper.

●"FIXED PAPER SIDE" and "DISABLE DUPLEX"

cannot be simultaneously enabled.

DISABLE STAPLE

FIXED PAPER SIDE

TYPE NAME

PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION

No.01

USER TYPE 1

DISABLE DUPLEX

DISABLE PUNCH

EXITCANCEL

LOADING PAPER

2-17

Setting the paper size when a special size is loaded

Perform steps 1 through 5 of "Setting the

paper type and paper size" (see page 2-14).

2Touch the [SIZE INPUT] key and then

touch the [AB] tab.

The size entry palette

appears.

3Touch the key or the key to enter

the X (width) and Y (length) dimensions of

the paper.

X (width) is initially

selected. To enter Y

(length), touch the [Y]

key and then enter the

length.

4Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the size

setting screen of step 2.

5If the paper is a non-standard size, select

the [NON STANDARD SIZE] checkbox.

Perform steps 8 through 10 of "Setting the

paper type and paper size" (pages 2-15).

Perform steps 1 through 5 of "Setting the

paper type and paper size" (see page 2-14).

2Touch the [SIZE SELECT] key.

The size selection

screen appears.

3Select the desired paper size.

There are separate screens for inch-based paper

selection and AB paper selection. Touch the

key or the key to switch between the screens.

4Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the size

setting screen of step 2.

Perform steps 8 through 10 of "Setting the

paper type and paper size" (pages 2-15).

NOTE

Special sizes of paper cannot be loaded in trays 1, 2, 4 and 5.

Trays 3 and the bypass tray

Y297

420

(148 432)

INCH

(100 297)

Y100

300

INCH

(148 432)

(100 297)

Y100

300

INCH

(148 432)

(100 297)

NON STANDARD

SIZE

17,8

14,8

2 1

11R,7

10 ,5

8 R

4 1

2 1

A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5

B5R,216x330(8 x13)

X300 Y100

Inserter (option)

SIZE SELECT

17,8

14,8

2 1

11R,7

10 ,5

A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B

AUTO-INCH

AUTO-AB

B5R

1/2

PLAIN 11X17

TYPE

INSERTER TYPE/SIZE SETTING

TYPE

SYSTEM SETTINGS

8 X14

2 8 X11

8 X11R

2 7 X10

4 1

2 5 X8 R

2 1

SIZE

8 X14

X10

1/2

TYPE

8 X11

5 X8 R

2 1

SIZE

2-18

SYSTEM SETTINGS

The system settings can be used as needed to meet the needs of your workplace. The items that can be set with the

system settings are shown below.

●Total count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .The number of pages processed by the machine and optional equipment

can be displayed. (See page 2-20)

●Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Used to configure the screen contrast, date and time, and keyboard

selection*1 settings. (See page 2-20)

●List print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to print lists of settings and fonts. (See page 2-20)

●Paper tray settings . . . . . . . . . . . .The paper type, paper size and automatic tray switching can be set for each

tray. Automatic tray switching allows feeding to switch between trays loaded

with the same type and size of paper. If one tray runs out of paper during

printing, printing will continue from the other tray. (See page 2-20)

For the detailed descriptions and use of the settings listed below, see the fax, image send, and printer

manuals.

●Address control*1. . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to store information for various functions.

●Sender control*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to store the sender's information that appears on your Scan to E-mail

transmissions at the destination.

●Fax data receive/forward*1. . . . . . Faxes received to memory and received Internet faxes can be forwarded to

another destination.

●Printer condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to configure default settings for the printer function (see the Operation

manual (for printer)).

●

Document filing control*

. . . . . . . . . Used to configure default settings for the document filing function. (pages 7-25

to 7-28)

●Administrator settings . . . . . . . . . These are items that are used by the administrator of the machine to

configure machine settings. A key appears for these settings in the system

settings menu screen. For information on these settings, see the

administrator settings guide.

*1 These settings can be configured in a system where the facsimile, network scanner and Internet fax function is

available.

*2 These settings can be configured in a system where the network scanner function is available.

General procedure for system settings

1Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

The system setting

menu screen will

appear.

2Touch the key of the desired item to

display its setting screen.

The example of selecting the [DEFAULT SETTINGS]

key and then the [CLOCK] key is explained below.

The system settings are described in detail on the

following pages.

3Touch the [CLOCK] key.

Touch the [CLOCK] key and then the following

screen appears.

4Touch the year, month, day, hour or minute

key, and then use the or key to

adjust the setting.

●If you select a non-existent date (for example,

Feb. 30), the [OK] key will grey out to prevent

entry of the date.

●Select [DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING]

checkbox to have the time automatically

change at the beginning and end of daylight

saving time.

JOB STATUS SYSTEM

SETTINGS

SYSTEM SETTINGS

LIST PRINT

FAX DATA

RECEIVE/FORWARD

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

PRINTER

CONDITION

EXIT

DEFAULT

SETTINGS

SENDER CONTROL

ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS

ADDRESS CONTROL

TOTAL COUNT

DOCUMENT FILING

CONTROL

SYSTEM SETTINGS

CLOCK ADJUST

DATE FORMAT

YEAR MONTH DAY HOUR MINUTE

2010 04 04 11 30

DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING

SYSTEM SETTINGS

2-19

5Touch the [DATE FORMAT] key.

The following screen appears.

If you wish to change the format of the date

and time, touch the desired format keys.

Touched keys are highlighted.

The selected format is applied to lists printed out in

"LIST PRINT".

7Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the

date and time setting

screen.

8Touch the [OK] key.

9To exit the settings, touch the [EXIT] key.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

DATE FORMAT

YYYY/MM/DD

MM/DD/YYYY

DAY-NAME

POSITION

FIRST 12-HOUR

24-HOUR

LAST

2010/04/04/SUN 11:30

DD/MM/YYYY

AME

T 12-HOUR

SYSTEM SETTINGS

LIST PRINT

FAX DATA

RECEIVE/FORWARD

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

EXIT

DEFAULT

SETTINGS

SENDER CONTROL

ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS

ADDRESS CONTROL

TOTAL COUNT

DOCUMENT FILING

CONTROL

PRINTER

CONDITION

More information on setting procedures

In the following type of screen, a setting is selected

by touching the key so that a checkmark ( )

appears. The settings below are configured to

allow use of tray 1 in print, copy, and fax modes. To

display the next screen, touch the or keys.

FAXCOPYPRINT

TRAY1

TYPE / SIZE

SYSTEM SETTINGS

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

PLAIN / A4

FIXED PAPER SIDE 1/8

DOC.

FILING

I-FAX

DISABLE DUPLEX

DISABLE STAPLE

DISABLE PUNCH

SYSTEM SETTINGS

2-20

About the settings

■Total count

This displays the following sheet counts (the

counts that can be displayed vary depending on

the options installed):

Number of pages output by the machine.

Number of original pages transmitted by the

machine.

Number of times the automatic document feeder

was used to feed original pages and number of

times the stapler was used (if installed).

Number of pages stored by document filing.

In the case of only,

●A3 (11" x 17") size paper is counted as two

sheets.

●Each sheet of paper used for automatic two-

sided copying is counted as two sheets (A3

(11" x 17") paper is counted as four sheets).

●Paper with an entered size of 384 mm (15-1/8")

or larger is counted as two sheets (four sheets

during automatic two-sided copying).

■Default settings

The following settings can be configured:

●Display contrast

Screen contrast adjustment is used to make the

LCD touch panel easier to view under various

lighting conditions. Touch the [LIGHTER] key to

make the screen lighter, or the [DARKER] key to

make the screen darker.

●Clock

Use this to set the date and time in the

machine's built-in clock. This clock is used by

functions that require date and time information.

●Keyboard select

The layout of the keyboard that appears in letter

entry screens can be changed.

Select the arrangement of the letter keys that

you find easiest to use.

The following three alphabet keyboard

configurations are available:

●Keyboard 1 (QWERT... configuration)*

●Keyboard 2 (AZERTY...configuration)

●Keyboard 3 (ABCDEF...configuration)

* The default setting is "Keyboard 1".

(Example: Character entry screen when

Keyboard 3 is selected)

■List print

This is used to print lists of machine settings and a

test page to check resident fonts.

The following lists and pages are available:

●All custom setting list

Shows the hardware status, software status,

printer configuration settings, tray settings, and

counts.

●Printer test page

Shows the PCL symbol set list, fonts, network

interface (NIC interface) settings, and settings

used for the NIC card.

●Sending address list

One touch destination list, group list, program

list, and memory box list.

●Document filing user / folder list

Shows the user names and folder names for

document filing.

●Sender control list

Shows the senders that have been stored.

■Paper tray settings

The paper type, paper size, enabled modes and

automatic tray switching can be set for each tray.

See page

2-14

for details on setting the paper type

and paper size. Automatic switching to another

paper tray is used to automatically switch to

another tray with the same size and type of paper in

the event that the paper runs out during continuous

printing. This requires that the trays be loaded with

the same size of paper. The paper tray settings can

be enabled or disabled for each tray, and for printer

mode, copy mode, fax mode, Internet fax mode,

and document filing mode. To enable any function,

touch the check box key so that a checkmark

()

appears.

ABC abc

NOTE

A test page cannot be printed if "PROHIBIT TEST

PAGE PRINTING" (See the "Operation manual (for

printer)".) has been set to "prohibited" in the

administrator settings.

2-21

REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES

When toner runs low, a message will appear to inform you that the toner cartridge must be replaced.

Follow the steps below to replace the toner cartridge.

1Open the front cover.

2Remove the toner cartridge gently.

Hold the toner cartridge

with both hands as

shown in the illustration,

and pull it out of the

machine.

3Remove the new toner cartridge from the

box and shake it five or six times

horizontally.

Shake the toner

cartridge horizontally.

Do not rotate it as shown

at left.

4Insert the new toner cartridge.

Align the toner cartridge

with the insert hole and

push it in as shown.

Do not rotate the

cartridge.

5Push the cartridge in until it locks securely

in place.

6Close the front cover.

NOTE

To view the approximate amount of toner remaining, hold down the [COPY] key during printing or when the

machine is on standby. The percentage of toner remaining will appear in the display while you hold down the key.

When the percentage falls to "20-0%" , obtain a new toner cartridge and keep it ready for replacement.

NOTE

Shake the toner

cartridge well to

ensure that the toner

flows well and will not

stick to the inside of

the cartridge.

CAUTION

●Do not throw the toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.

●Store toner cartridges out of the reach of small children.

NOTE

Place the used toner cartridge in the plastic bag and store it. When placing the toner cartridge in the bag, insert

it horizontally, not vertically. If the cartridge is stood on end, the collected used toner may spill out and soil the floor

or your clothes.

2-22

STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

Standard supplies for this product that can replaced by the user include paper, toner cartridges, and staple cartridges

for the finisher.

■Proper storage

1. Store the supplies in a location that is:

●clean and dry,

●at a stable temperature,

●not exposed to direct sunlight.

2. Store paper in the wrapper and lying flat.

3. Paper stored in packages standing up or out of

the wrapper may curl or become damp, resulting

in paper misfeeds.

4. Store a new toner cartridge box horizontally. Do

not store it standing on end. If stored standing on

end, the toner may not distribute well even after

shaking the cartridge vigorously, and will remain

inside the cartridge without flowing out.

For best copying results, be sure to use only Sharp Genuine Supplies which are designed,

engineered, and tested to maximize the life and performance of Sharp products. Look for

the Genuine Supplies label on the toner package.

GENUINE SUPPLIES

Supply and Consumables

The supply of spare parts for a repair of the appliance is guaranteed for at least 7 years following the termination

of production. Spare parts are those parts of the apparatus which may break down within the scope of the ordinary

use of the product - whereas those parts which normally exceed the life of the product are not to be considered

as spare parts. Consumables too, are available for 7 years following the termination of production.

2-23

MISFEED REMOVAL

When a misfeed has occurred during printing, the message "A MISFEED HAS OCCURRED". will appear in the touch

panel display of the operation panel and printing including copying and facsimile output will stop. The approximate

misfeed locations are indicated with " " shown in the illustration below. The page numbers for detailed information

on misfeed removal are also shown.

Misfeed removal guidance

Misfeed removal guidance can be displayed by touching the [INFORMATION] key on the touch panel after a misfeed

has occurred.

Misfeed in the transport area, fusing

area, and exit area (See page 2-24)

Misfeed in the automatic document

feeder (See page 2-31)

When feeding paper from tray 2, the

bypass tray, or tray 5, this mark may

blink. When the mark blinks, check the

following diagrams:

●Fourth diagram in step 3 on page 2-26

●Diagram in step 6 on page 2-27

●Diagram in step 8 on page 2-29, 2-30

Misfeed in the bypass tray (See page 2-28)

Misfeed in the finisher (See page 3-11)

Misfeed in the saddle

stitch finisher

(See page 3-11)

Misfeed in the

inserter (See page 3-17)

Misfeed in the

tray 3 (See page 2-27)

Misfeed in the

tray 4 (See page 2-27)

Misfeed in

tray 1 - tray 2

(See page 2-26)

Misfeed in the

tray 5 (See page 2-29, 2-30)

NOTE

Printing is not possible when a misfeed occurs, and thus any faxes or Internet faxes received at this time will be

temporarily held in memory. The faxes will print out automatically as soon as the misfeed is cleared.

NOTES

●Do not damage or touch the photoconductive

drum. (See page 2-24.)

●Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during

removal.

●lf paper is accidentally torn during removal, be

sure to remove all pieces.

Fusing unit

CAUTION

The fusing unit is hot. Take

care in removing paper.

INFORMATION

MISFEED REMOVAL

2-24

Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and exit area

1Remove the duplex unit.

Grasp the finger hold

and gently open the unit.

2Remove the misfed paper as shown in the

illustrations below.

Misfed in the transport area

Turn roller rotating knob

A in the direction of the

arrow to remove the

misfed paper.

Misfed in the fusing area

Turn roller rotating knob

B in the direction of the

arrow to remove the

misfed paper.

If the misfed paper is

inside the fusing area,

turn down the fusing unit

open tab to open the

fusing unit and remove

the misfed paper.

Misfed in the exit area

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

3Gently close the duplex unit.

After closing, confirm

that the misfeed

message has been

cleared and the normal

display appears.

CAUTION

The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing paper.

(Do not touch the metal parts.)

NOTES

Do not touch or

damage the transfer

roller.

Do not touch or

damage the

photoconductive

drum.

After clearing the

misfeed, promptly

close the duplex unit.

Leaving the unit

open may adversely affect the photo-sensitive drum

and cause poor copy quality.

Roller rotating knob A

Transfer roller

Photoconductive drum

CAUTION

The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing paper.

(Do not touch any metal parts.)

Roller rotating knob B

Fusing unit open tab

MISFEED REMOVAL

2-25

Misfeed in the duplex unit

1Remove the duplex unit.

Grasp the finger hold

and gently open the unit.

2Open the cover of the duplex unit.

3Remove the misfed paper.

Misfeed in upper part of unit

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Misfeed in lower part of unit

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

4Close the cover of the duplex unit.

5Gently close the duplex unit.

After closing the duplex

unit, confirm that the

misfeed message has

been cleared and the

normal display appears.

MISFEED REMOVAL

2-26

Misfeed in the paper feed area

■Misfeed in paper tray 1 - tray 2

1Remove the duplex unit.

Grasp the finger hold

and gently open the unit.

2Remove the misfed paper.

Turn roller rotating knob

A in the direction of the

arrow to remove the

misfed paper.

3If misfed paper is not found in step 2, pull

out paper tray 1 - tray 2 and remove the

misfed paper.

Grasp the finger hold

and gently open the unit.

Pull the tray all the way

out until it stops.

●

If paper is misfed in tray 1 (left-side tray)...

Lift the paper guide and

remove the misfed

paper.

Be sure to replace the

paper guide in its

original position after

removing the paper.

●

If paper is misfed in tray 2 (right-side tray)...

When using tray 2,

check the paper transfer

unit inside the tray and

remove any misfed

paper.

4Gently close paper tray 1 - tray 2.

Push the tray all the way

back in.

5Gently close the duplex unit.

After closing, confirm

that the misfeed

message has been

cleared and the normal

display appears.

NOTE

Be sure to follow the misfeed removal sequence. Do not pull the tray out immediately as the misfeed may have

occurred with paper partially fed out of the tray. Open the left cover and see if there is misfed paper first (steps 1

and 2). If you open the tray without checking, the partially fed paper may tear and leave torn pieces in the machine,

increasing the difficulty of removal.

NOTE

A misfeed may occur inside the compartment, so

please check the entire compartment carefully.

Roller rotating knob A

MISFEED REMOVAL

2-27

■Misfeed in paper tray 3

1Remove the duplex unit.

Grasp the finger hold

and gently open the unit.

2Remove the misfed paper.

Turn roller rotating knob

A in the direction of the

arrow to remove the

misfed paper.

3Open the lower cover on the left side of the

machine.

Grasp the finger hold

and gently open the unit.

4Remove the misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

5Close the lower cover on the left side of

the machine.

If misfed paper is not found in step 3, pull out

paper tray 3 and remove the misfed paper.

Pull the tray all the way

out until it stops.

Check the paper

transfer unit inside the

tray.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

7Gently close paper tray 3.

Push the tray all the way

back in.

8Gently close the duplex unit.

After closing, confirm

that the misfeed

message has been

cleared and the normal

display appears.

■Misfeed in the tray 4

To remove a misfeed in tray 4, follow the same steps as in "Misfeed in paper tray 3".

NOTE

A misfeed may occur inside the compartment, so

please check the entire compartment carefully.

Roller rotating knob A

MISFEED REMOVAL

2-28

■Misfeed in the bypass tray

1Remove the misfed paper from the bypass

tray.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

2If you did not find a misfeed in step 1, open

the side cover and remove the misfeed.

3Gently close the side cover.

4Remove tray 1 - tray 2.

Grasp the finger hold

and gently open the unit.

Pull the tray all the way

out until it stops.

5Remove the misfed paper.

Check the paper

transfer unit inside the

tray and remove any

misfed paper.

6Gently close paper tray 1 - tray 2.

Push the tray all the way

back in.

Make sure that the

misfeed message no

longer appears (the

normal message display

should appear).

NOTE

If a misfeed occurs during printing from the bypass

tray while paper is being loaded in tray 1 - tray 2,

push tray 1 - tray 2 back in to close it, and then pull

the tray out again.

MISFEED REMOVAL

2-29

■Misfeed in the tray 5 (AR-LC6)

1Open the side cover.

2Remove the misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

3Gently close the side cover.

4Close the bypass tray.

5Open the top cover of tray 5.

6Open the top cover and remove the misfed

paper.

After removing the

misfed paper, close the

top cover.

7Remove tray 1 - tray 2.

Grasp the finger hold

and gently open the unit.

Pull the tray all the way

out until it stops.

8Remove the misfed paper.

Check the paper

transfer unit inside the

tray and remove any

misfed paper.

9Gently close paper tray 1 - tray 2.

Push the tray all the way

back in.

Make sure that the

misfeed message no

longer appears (the

normal message display

should appear).

NOTE

If a misfeed occurs in the following situation, push

tray 1 - tray 2 back in to close it and then pull the tray

out again:

●A misfeed occurs during printing from tray 5 while

paper is being loaded in tray 1 or tray 2.

MISFEED REMOVAL

2-30

■Misfeed in the tray 5 (AR-LC7)

If a paper misfeed occurs, follow the steps below to remove the misfeed.

1Open the side cover.

2Remove the misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear

the misfed paper

during removal.

3Gently close the side cover.

4Close the bypass tray.

5Open the top cover of the AR-LC7 (tray 5).

Hold the top cover

open.

6Remove the misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear

the misfed paper

during removal.

After removing the

misfed paper, close the

top cover.

7Pull out tray 1 - tray 2.

Grasp the finger hold

and gently open the

tray.

Pull the tray all the way

out until it stops.

8Remove the misfed paper.

Check the paper

transfer unit inside the

tray. If there is a

misfeed in the paper

transfer unit, remove

the misfeed.

9Gently push tray 1-tray 2 into the machine.

Push the tray firmly all

the way into the

machine.

Make sure that the

misfeed message no

longer appears (the

normal message

display should appear).

NOTE

If a misfeed occurs in the following situation, push tray

1 - tray 2 back in and then pull the tray out again:

●A misfeed occurs during printing from tray 5 (AR-

LC7) while paper is being loaded in tray 1 - tray 2.

2-31

REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED

Removing a misfed original from the automatic document feeder

If an original misfeed occurs in the automatic document feeder, follow the steps below to remove the misfed original.

Check locations A and B in the diagram at left to

remove the original.

1Removing misfeeds from each location.

●Check location A

Open the document

feeder cover and gently

remove the misfed

original without tearing

it. Close the document

feeder cover.

●Check location B

●Misfeed in the transfer unit

Open the document

transfer cover, hold the

paper guide open, and

remove the misfed

original.

●Misfeed in the document exit unit

Open the document

transfer cover. Rotate

the transfer roller in the

direction of the arrow

and gently remove the

original without tearing it.

2Open and close the document feeder

cover.

Opening and closing the

cover clears the misfeed

display. Copying cannot

be resumed until this

step is performed.

However, this step is not

necessary after a

misfeed is removed from location B.

A message may appear indicating the number of

originals which must be returned to the document

feeder tray. Return the originals to the document

feeder tray and press the [START] key.

NOTES

●For misfeed removal in the main unit and other peripheral devices, see page 2-23

●When a misfeed occurs, touch the [INFORMATION] key to display detailed information for misfeed removal.

2-32

TROUBLESHOOTING

Check the following troubleshooting list before requesting service as many problems can be fixed by the user. If you

are unable to solve the problem by checking the list, turn off the main power switch and the power switch, unplug the

power cord.

Problems related to general use of the machine are described below. For problems related to the copy function, see

page 6-3. For problems related to document filing, see page 7-31. For fax, printer, and network scanner/Internet fax

problems, see the manuals for those functions. For peripheral device problems, see the explanation of the device.

If the message "CALL FOR SERVICE. CODE:**-**"(Note) appears in the touch panel, turn off the main power switch

and the power switch, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the main power switch and the power switch back on.

If the message still appears after turning the main power switch and the power switch off and on several times, it

is likely that a failure has occurred that requires service. In this event, stop using the machine, unplug the power

cord, and contact your Sharp dealer.

Note: Letters and numbers appear in "**-**". When you contact your Sharp dealer, please tell your dealer what

letters and numbers appear.

Problem Check Solution or cause

The machine does

not operate.

Machine plugged in? Plug the machine into a grounded outlet.

The main power switch and power

switch are not turned on?

Turn on the main power switch and the power

switch. (Page 1-17)

READY indicator off?

The printer is warming up. (Warm-up time is

approximately 120 seconds.) Wait until the

READY indicator lights up.

Message indicating need to load paper

displayed? Load paper. (Page 2-2)

Message indicating need to replace the

toner cartridge displayed? Replace the toner cartridge. (Page 2-21)

Message indicating a paper misfeed

displayed? Remove misfed paper. (Page 2-23)

Copying/printing is

not possible.

A message appears saying that this type

of paper cannot be used for two-sided

copying.

Two-sided printing is not possible on special

paper. Use paper that can be used for automatic

two-sided printing. (Page 2-13)

Incorrect bypass

tray paper size.

Incorrect display of paper sizes , A3, B4,

A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13"

or 8-1/2" x 11"R only.

When loading sizes A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17",

8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13" or 8-1/2" x 11"R, be

sure to open the tray extension.

Copying/printing on

paper from the

bypass tray is

skewed.

The number of sheets placed on the bypass

tray exceeds the maximum number.

Do not place more than the maximum number of

sheets.

The bypass guide is not adjusted to the

size of the loaded paper.

Adjust the bypass guide to the size of the loaded

paper.

TROUBLESHOOTING

2-33

Paper from the

bypass tray

misfeeds.

The paper size and paper type have not

been set.

Be sure to set the paper size and paper type

when using special size or special type papers.

(Page 2-14)

The number of sheets placed on the bypass

tray exceeds the maximum number.

Do not place more than the maximum number of

sheets.

The bypass guide is not adjusted to the

size of the loaded paper.

Adjust the bypass guide to the size of the loaded

paper.

Printing stops

before the job is

finished.

If too many pages collect on the output

tray, the tray full sensor activates and

stops printing.

Remove the paper from the output tray.

The paper tray is out of paper. Load paper. (Page 2-2)

Smudges on printed

sheets

Does a message appear indicating the

need for maintenance?

Please contact the your dealer as soon as

possible.

The displayed paper

size or paper type

does not match the

loaded paper size or

paper type.

The correct paper size or paper type is

not set in the paper tray settings of the

system settings.

When loading paper, if you change the paper

size from an AB size to an inch size, or from an

inch size to an AB size, or change the paper

type, be sure to set the new paper type as

explained in "Setting the paper type and paper

size" (see page 2-14).

When printing on a

special size of

paper, part of the

printed image is

missing.

The paper size setting is not set

correctly in the paper tray settings of the

system settings.

When using a special size of paper, set the

correct paper size as explained in "Setting the

paper type and paper size" on page

2-14

. If the

paper size setting is not correct, part of the image

may be cut off or the image may not be printed.

When printing on a

special size of paper

using the bypass

tray, part of the

printed image is

missing.

The paper size is not set correctly in the

special size settings for the bypass tray.

When using a special size of paper, set the

correct paper size as explained in "Setting the

paper type and paper size" on page

2-14

. If the

paper size setting is not correct, part of the image

may be cut off or the image may not be printed.

Paper misfeeds

frequently.

Is paper other than SHARP-

recommended paper being used? Use SHARP-recommended paper. (Page 2-22

)

Paper curled or damp?

Do not use curled or crimped paper. If you will

not use the paper for a long time, remove the

paper from the tray and store it in the wrapper in

a cool and dark location so that it will not absorb

moisture.

Is the paper curled and does it

frequently misfeed in the finisher or

saddle stitch finisher?

Paper may be curled when output depending on

the paper type and quality.

In some cases turning the paper over in the tray

will reduce misfeeding due to curling.

Multiple sheets of paper fed

simultaneously?

Remove the paper

from the paper

tray or the bypass

tray, fan the paper

as shown in the

illustration, and

then load it again.

The paper in the tray is not stacked

evenly.

Make sure that the paper in the paper tray is

stacked evenly. If the stack is not even, paper

misfeeds will occur.

Problem Check Solution or cause

TROUBLESHOOTING

2-34

Printed paper is

wrinkled or the

image rubs off

easily.

Is paper other than SHARP-

recommended paper being used? Use SHARP-recommended paper. (Page 2-22

)

Is the paper size or weight outside the

specifications? Use paper within the specifications.

Paper damp?

Be sure to store paper in the wrapper in a dry

location and do not store paper in a location that is

●humid

●at a high temperature or an extremely low

temperature

●exposed to direct sunlight

●dusty.

The contrast on the

touch panel is too

high or too low.

Is LCD contrast properly adjusted?

Adjust the screen contrast using "DISPLAY

CONTRAST" in "DEFAULT SETTINGS" of the

system settings. (Page 2-20)

Printing takes place

on the wrong side of

the paper.

The paper is loaded in the tray with the

print side face down*.

* Face up if the paper type is "PRE-

PRINTED" or "LETTER HEAD".

Load paper in the tray with the print side face up.

However, if the paper type is "PRE-PRINTED" or

"LETTER HEAD", load the paper with the print

side face down*.

* If the two-sided function has been prohibited

using "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the

administrator settings (page 11 of the

administrator settings guide), load the paper

face up.

Marks appear at

regular intervals on

printed pages.

Paper with punch holes is being used.

If the original image overlaps the punch holes,

marks will appear at the position of the holes on

the back of the paper after one-sided printing, or

on the front and back of the paper after two-sided

printing. Make sure that the original image does

not overlap the punch holes.

Problem Check Solution or cause

3-1

CHAPTER 3

PERIPHERAL DEVICES

This chapter explains the procedures for using the optional finisher,

saddle stitch finisher, and inserter, as well as Sharp OSA (application

communication module and external account module).

Page

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER........................................ 3-2

●Part names...................................................................................... 3-2

●Specifications.................................................................................. 3-2

●Finishing methods........................................................................... 3-4

●Finishing modes and finisher functions........................................... 3-6

●Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal.................... 3-7

●Removing a misfeed........................................................................ 3-11

●Troubleshooting finisher/saddle stitch finisher problems................. 3-13

INSERTER .............................................................................................. 3-14

●Part names...................................................................................... 3-14

●Specifications.................................................................................. 3-14

●Loading paper ................................................................................. 3-15

●Manual operation of the inserter ..................................................... 3-15

●Misfeed removal.............................................................................. 3-17

●Troubleshooting inserter problems.................................................. 3-18

SHARP OSA ........................................................................................... 3-19

APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MX-AMX2)..................... 3-19

●Standard application setup.............................................................. 3-19

●Selecting a standard application ..................................................... 3-19

●Operation in OSA mode.................................................................. 3-20

EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3) ...................................... 3-21

●External account application setup ................................................. 3-21

●Operation in external account mode ............................................... 3-21

3-2

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

The finisher and the saddle stitch finisher include the offset function, which offsets each set of copies from the

preceding set for easy separation. Each set of sorted copies can also be stapled. The saddle stitch finisher can

automatically staple a set of copies at the centre line and fold the pages to create a pamphlet.

A punch module unit can be installed to add punch holes to copies, and an inserter can be installed to insert blank

pages at specified pages.

In the following explanations, the finisher and saddle stitch finisher are referred to simply as "finisher".

Part names

Specifications

* The illustrations on the following pages (to page 3-18) show the AR-F16; however, the operation of the AR-F15

is the same as the AR-F16.

NOTES

●Do not press on the finisher.

●Use caution when near the offset tray during printing as the tray moves up and down.

Name Finisher (AR-F15) Saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16)

Number of trays 2 3

Paper output Face down output

Paper capacity

Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:

Non-stapling:

2000 sheets of paper or total aggregate

thickness is within 250mm (9-53/64"):

A4, B5, A5R, 8-1/2" x 11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R

(80

(20 lbs.))

1000 sheets of paper

or total aggregate

thickness is within 140mm (5-1/2")

Sizes other than the above

Stapling:

100 sets or 750 pages of A4, B5 or 8-1/2"

x 11" paper.

100 sets or 500 pages of other sizes of

paper

Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:

Non-stapling:

2000 sheets of paper or total aggregate thickness

is within 250mm (9-53/64"): A4, B5, A5R, 8-1/2" x

11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, (80

(20 lbs.))

1000 sheets of paper or total aggregate thickness is

within 140mm (5-1/2"): Sizes other than the above

Stapling:

100 sets or 750 pages or total aggregate thickness is

within 110mm (4-5/16") of A4, B5 or 8-1/2" x 11" paper.

100 sets or 500 pages or total aggregate thickness

is within 74mm (2-29/32") of other sizes of paper

Lower tray:

Stapled print capacity is (11 - 15) sheets x 10 sets, (6

- 10) sheets x 20 sets, (1 - 5) sheets x 25 sets.

Tray

Offset pages and stapled

pages are delivered here.

Stapler compiler

Paper to be stapled is stacked

temporarily.

Top cover

Open for misfeed removal.

Punch module (Option)

Adds punch holes to printed pages.

Front cover

Open to replace the staple

case in the staple unit or clear

jammed staples.

Lower cover

Open to clear misfed paper or

replace the staple cartridge in the

pamphlet unit. (AR-F16 only)

Saddle stitch tray

Saddle stitched output is

delivered here.

(AR-F16 only)

Finisher

(AR-F15) Saddle stitch

finisher (AR-F16)

Finisher (AR-F15)

Saddle stitch finisher

(AR-F16)

(Continued on next page)

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-3

*For index paper, equivalent to 140-lbs.

*1 Multiple punch modules cannot be installed together. Some models may not be available in some regions.

*2 With AR-PN4B, two or three holes can be punched depending on the paper size.

*3 With AR-PN4C and AR-PN4D, the number of holes is the same. The hole interval, however, is not the same.

Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.

■Supplies

The finisher and saddle stitch finisher require the following staple cartridge:

●Staple cartridge for finisher

(approx. 5,000 per cartridge

X 3 cartridges)

SF-SC11

●Staple cartridge for saddle

stitch finisher (approx. 2000

per cartridge X 3 cartridges)

AR-SC3

Paper size

Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17",

8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-

1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-

1/2"R

Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17",

8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2"

x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R

Lower tray:

A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R

Paper weight Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:

60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68* lbs.)

Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray/Lower tray:

60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68* lbs.)

Paper full detection Both upper and lower tray Upper, middle and lower tray

Paper sizes for which

offset is possible

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R

Allowed paper sizes for

stapling

Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x

14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x

11"R

Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",

8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R

Lower tray:

A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R

Maximum number of

sheets for stapling See "Staple sort mode" on 3-4 page

Stapling positions 1 place at back, 1 place at back (diagonal), one place at front (diagonal), 2 places

Paper conveying Centre reference

Power supply Supplied from machine

Dimensions

When tray is folded up: 648 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x1150 mm(H)

(25-33/64" (W) x 24-13/16" (D) x 45-9/32" (H))

When tray is extended: 773 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x1150 mm(H)

(30-7/16" (W) x 24-13/16" (D) x 45-9/32" (H))

Not including stopper (40 mm (1-37/64")) when attached to machine

Weight Approx. 51 kg (Approx. 113 lbs.) Approx. 71 kg (Approx. 157

lbs.

)

Overall dimensions when

attached to machine

773 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) (Separation from machine 400 mm)

(30-7/16" (W) x 24-13/16" (D) (Separation from machine 15-3/4"))

Name Punch module

Model*1AR-PN4A AR-PN4B*2AR-PN4C*3AR-PN4D*3

Number of holes 2 3 or 2 4 4

Paper sizes for hole

punching

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,

B5R,

11"x17", 8-1/2"x14",

8-1/2"x13",

8-1/2"x11",

8-1/2"x11"R

3 holes: A3, A4,

11" x 17",

8-1/2" x 11"

2 holes: 8-1/2"x14",

8-1/2"x13",

8-1/2" x 11"R

A3, A4

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,

B5R,

11"x17", 8-1/2"x14",

8-1/2"x13",

8-1/2"x11",

8-1/2"x11"R

Paper weight 60 to 256

(16 to 68 lbs.)

Power supply Supplied from finisher / saddle stitch finisher

Dimensions 95 mm (W) x 560 mm (D) x 170 mm (H) (3-3/4

(W) x 22-1/16

(D) x 6-45/64

(H))

Weight Approx. 3.5 kg (Approx. 7.8 lbs.)

NOTES

●The following papers cannot be stapled and punched:

Special papers such as transparency film and label sheets

●If mixed paper sizes are selected for stapling jobs, stapling will be automatically cancelled.

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-4

Finishing methods

■Sort mode

Sorted sets will be delivered.

■Group mode

Groups of copies of the same page will be

delivered.

■Offset mode

Each set of copies is offset from the preceding set to

allow easy separation.

(The offset function operates in the finisher / saddle

stitch finisher tray.)

The offset function cannot be selected when the

staple sort function is selected.

Offset width : Approx. 30 mm (Approx. 1-3/16")

■Staple sort mode

Output pages are sorted into sets by the sort function, and each set is stapled and delivered to the tray. The centre

of the paper can also be stapled and delivered to the lower saddle tray (only when using the saddle stitch finisher).

The relations between possible stapling positions, the paper feed direction, paper sizes that can be used, and

number of pages that can be stapled are shown below.

Two sheets (one sheet when using the saddle stitch function) of 256 g/m2 (68 lbs.) paper can be included as

covers in the page stapling limit in the table below.

Original Printouts

Offset mode Non-offset mode

Saddle stitch on

centrefold line.

(only when using

the saddle stitch

finisher)

Stapling positions

Top left corner of

printouts

Lower left corner

of printouts

Centre left two

positions of

printouts

Portrait orientation Landscape orientation

Available paper sizes:

A4, B5 and 8-1/2" x 11"

Stapling capacity:

For each size, up to 50 sheets

can be stapled

Same as above

Paper in the portrait

direction cannot be saddle

stitched.

Available paper sizes:

A3, B4, 11" x 17"

Stapling capacity:

For each size, up to 30 sheets

can be stapled

Available paper sizes:

A4R, 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13",

8-1/2" x 11"R

Stapling capacity:

For each size, up to 30 sheets

can be stapled

Available paper sizes:

A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17",

8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13",

8-1/2" x 11"R

Stapling capacity:

For each size, up to 30 sheets

can be stapled

Same as above

Available paper sizes:

A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17",

8-1/2" x 11"R,

Stapling capacity:

For each size, up to 15 sheets

can be stapled

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-5

■Original orientation when using the staple sort or punch function

When using the staple sort or punch function, the original must be placed in the following orientations to enable

stapling or punching in the desired position on the paper.

■Saddle stitch function (only saddle stitch finisher)

The saddle stitch finisher can automatically place

two staples for centreline binding of prints or copies

and fold them along the centreline.

■Hole punching (only if a punch module is installed)

When the optional punch module is installed, holes

can be punched in printed pages. (When using the

saddle stitch finisher, pamphlet style stapling and

the punch function cannot be used together.) When

using the punch function, automatic rotation of the

original image does not operate.

For the allowed paper sizes for punching, see the

specifications on page 3-3.

When using the punch function in copy mode,

place the original with the top toward the inside of

the machine. If the original is not placed in this

orientation, punching will not take place at the

correct positions. (See "Standard original

placement orientations" on page 4-4.)

Staple sort

Document feeder Document glass

Punch

Document feeder Document glass

xamp

{Original 1} {Punch positions}

{Original 2} {Punch positions}

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-6

Finishing modes and finisher functions

Touch the [OUTPUT] key on the main screen of copy mode to display the screen that allows selection of sort, staple

sort, group function, centreline stapling, and the output tray.

[GROUP] key (See page 3-4.)

When Group is selected, copies will be grouped by

page.

[STAPLE SORT] key (See page 3-4.)

When Staple Sort is selected, sorted sets will be

stapled and delivered to the offset tray. (They will

not be offset stacked.) Select from three stapling

positions.

[SORT] key (See page 3-4.)

When Sort is selected, sets of copies will be

collated.

[FINISHER TRAY] key (See page 3-2.)

When the offset function is selected, output is

delivered offset to the finisher tray. (The finisher

tray is automatically selected when the staple sort

function is turned on.)

[OFFSET] key (See page 3-4.)

The offset function operates when a checkmark

appears in this key. (The offset checkmark is

automatically cleared when the staple sort function

is enabled.)

[CENTRE TRAY] key

If the centre tray is selected, output paper will be

delivered to the exit tray located above the main

unit.

[OK] key

Touch to close the [OUTPUT] screen and return to

the main screen.

[SADDLE STITCH] key (See page 3-5.)

This is displayed when the saddle stitch finisher is

installed, and is used to staple pages at the centre

and fold them in half to create a pamphlet.

Touch this key to display the pamphlet copy

setting screen (page 5-6). (This is only possible

when the [AUTOMATIC SADDLE STITCH]

checkbox is selected in the administrator settings

(see page 12 of the administrator settings guide).)

[PUNCH] key (See page 3-5.)

This is used to punch holes in printed pages when

an optional punch module is installed.

OUTPUT

SORT

STAPLE

SORT

GROUP

FINISHER

TRAY CENTRE

TRAY

OFFSET

SADDLE

STITCH PUNCH

NOTE

When a functions is selected, it is highlighted.

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-7

Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal

When a finisher is installed, a message will appear when the staple cartridge runs out of staples or a staple jam

occurs.

Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge or remove jammed staples.

■Replacing the cartridge in the finisher

1Open the front cover of the finisher.

2Lower the blue lever in the stapler and

slide out the staple cartridge.

3Pull the empty staple case straight up and

out of the cartridge.

4Insert a new staple case into the cartridge.

Push the staple case all the way in until it

clicks into place.

Do not remove the seal

holding the staples until

the staple case is set in

the cartridge.

5Pull the seal that holds the staples straight

out.

6Insert the cartridge all the way in until it

clicks into place.

Insert the cartridge all

the way in until it clicks

into place.

7Close the front cover of the finisher.

NOTE

Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to

verify that stapling is performed properly.

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-8

■Replacing the cartridge in the saddle stitch finisher

Only when the saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16) is installed.

1Open the lower cover of the saddle stitch

finisher.

When an optional

inserter is installed,

open the front cover of

the inserter before

opening the lower cover

of the finisher.

2Slide out the saddle stitch unit carefully

toward the front.

3(1) Grasp the grip of the saddle staple

holder and pull it out.

(2) While still grasping the grip, rotate the

saddle staple holder 90° in the direction of

the arrow (rotate to the right).

4Remove the empty staple case and set a

new one.

Replace both staple

cases with new ones.

Remove the cover from

the staple cartridge and

then install the cartridge.

5Return the saddle stitch holder and the

saddle stitch unit to their respective

original positions.

6Make sure that the finisher is firmly

attached to the machine and that A3, A4R,

or B4 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R, or 8-1/2" x

14") size paper is loaded.

If one of the above paper sizes is not set, test

stapling cannot be performed.

7Close the lower cover of the finisher.

Test stapling is

automatically performed

on a blank sheet.

This operation is carried

out to avoid blank

stapling.

(1)

(2)

NOTE

If test stapling fails to take place, repeat steps 1 to 7.

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-9

■Removing a staple jam in the finisher

1Perform steps 1 to 2 of the procedure for

"Replacing the cartridge in the finisher"

on page 3-7.

2Holding the knob, lower part (A).

3Remove any jammed staples.

4Holding the knob, return part (A) to its

original position.

5Return the staple case to its original

position.

Insert the cartridge all

the way in until it clicks

into place.

6Close the front cover of the finisher.

NOTE

Do not touch the stapling area.

The stapler could injure you.

(A)

Stapling area (A)

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-10

■Removing a staple jam in the saddle stitch finisher

1Perform steps 1 to 3 of the procedure for

"Replacing the cartridge in the saddle

stitch finisher" on page 3-8.

2Remove the empty staple case.

3While pushing down on lever (A), pull up

knob (B) .

4Remove any jammed staples, and then

return knob (B) to its original position.

Be sure to remove any

strips of staples.

5Return the staple case to its original

position.

6Return the saddle stitch holder and the

saddle stitch unit to their respective

original positions.

7Make sure that the finisher is firmly

attached to the machine and that A3, A4R,

or B4 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R, or 8-1/2" x

14") size paper is loaded.

If one of the above paper sizes is not set, test

stapling cannot be performed.

8Close the lower cover of the finisher.

Test stapling is automatically performed on a blank

sheet.

This operation is carried out to avoid blank

stapling.

■Disposal of hole punch scrap (when the punch module is installed)

1Open the cover of the hole punch module. 2Holding the black handle, slide out the

case containing the paper bits, and

dispose of them properly.

3Return the waste case to its original

position.

4Close the cover of the hole punch module.

NOTE

Do not touch the stapling area.

The stapler could injure you.

(A)

(B)

Jammed staples

NOTE

If test stapling fails to take place, repeat steps 1 to 7.

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-11

Removing a misfeed

When a misfeed occurs, remove the misfed paper as explained below.

■General procedure for the finisher and saddle stitch finisher

1Gently move the finisher/saddle stitch

finisher away from the machine while

pressing the button.

When an inserter is

installed, separate the

inserter from the

machine while pressing

on the inserter button.

2Remove the misfed paper from the main

unit.

After removing the

misfed paper, perform

steps 1 and 3 on page 2-

24 to reset the machine.

3Open the upper cover of the finisher/

saddle stitch finisher.

When an inserter is

installed, lift the tray of

the inserter.

4Lift knob (A) (See the step 3 figure), then

remove any misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

5Lift knob (B) (see the illustration in step 4)

and remove any misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

6Remove any misfed paper from the paper

exit area.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

7Close the upper cover of the finisher/

saddle stitch finisher.

■

When a saddle stitch finisher is installed

8Open the front cover of the inserter (only

when an inserter is installed).

9Open the lower cover of the saddle stitch

finisher.

Open the entrance cover of the saddle

stitch unit.

(A)

(B)

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-12

Remove the misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Close the entrance cover of the saddle

stitch unit.

Turn the right-hand knob counter

clockwise. Then, push the left-hand knob

and turn it clockwise.

Remove any paper misfed on the exit side

of the saddle stitch unit.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Open the exit cover of the saddle stitch

unit and remove any misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Close the exit cover of the saddle stitch

unit.

Close the lower cover of the saddle stitch

finisher.

Close the front cover of the inserter (only

when an inserter is installed).

■When a punch module is installed

Open the cover of the hole punch module.

Rotate the green knob until the arrow is

within the range (A) on the label, and

remove the misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Close the cover of the hole punch module.

Push the finisher back against the main

unit.

(A)

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-13

Troubleshooting finisher/saddle stitch finisher problems

Check the list below before calling for service.

* When a hole punch module is installed

Problem Check Solution or cause

Stapling position is

not correct

(including saddle

stitch).

Stapling position not set properly? Check the stapling position setting. (See page

3-4.)

The finisher/saddle

stitch finisher does

not operate.

Are any finisher/saddle stitch finisher

covers open?

Close all covers. (See step 7 on page 3-7 and

step 7 on page 3-11.)

Message indicating need to remove paper

from the stapler compiler displayed?

Remove all remaining paper from the stapler

compiler. (For the stapler compiler, see "Part

names" on page 3-2.)

Stapling cannot be

performed (including

saddle stitch).

Message to check the staple unit

displayed?

Remove jammed staples. (See pages 3-9 and

3-10.)

Message to add staples displayed?

Replace the staple cartridge. (See pages 3-7

and 3-8.) Check that a staple cartridge has

been installed. (See pages 3-7 and 3-8.)

Different sizes of paper mixed together? Stapling cannot be performed on mixed paper

sizes.

The paper is badly curled.

The quality and type of some papers may

cause bad curling that prevents stapling.

Take the paper out of the tray or bypass tray,

turn the stack over, and reload it.

Saddle stitch cannot

be selected.

The paper type of the selected paper tray

is set to heavy paper.

Saddle stitch is not possible on heavy paper.

However, when cover insertion is selected,

saddle stitch is possible on a single sheet of

heavy paper inserted for use as a cover.

The punch hole

positions are not

correct.*

The punch function is not set to the correct

punch positions.

Check the allowed hole punch positions. (See

page 3-5.)

Cannot be punched.*

Message to check the punch module

displayed? Dispose of punch scraps. (See page 3-10.)

Mixed paper sizes. Punching is not possible when different paper

sizes are mixed together.

The paper is badly curled.

The quality and type of some papers may

cause bad curling that prevents punching.

Take the paper out of the tray or bypass tray,

turn the stack over, and reload it.

3-14

INSERTER

The inserter enables blank sheets or printed sheets to be added to copy and print output as covers or inserts

without printing. The inserter also allows feeding of heavy paper that cannot be fed from the other trays.

Printed output can also be fed one set at a time from the inserter for stapling or punching without performing

stapling or staple sorting finishing (see "Manual operation of the inserter" (page 3-15)).

When feeding from the inserter for pamphlet copying (page 5-6), cover or insert copying (page 5-12), or

transparency insert copying (page 5-23), select "INSERTER" in step 4 of "Setting the paper type and paper size"

(page 2-14), and be sure to perform steps 5 through 8. In step 9, make sure that the checkboxes below "PRINT",

"COPY", and "DOC. FILING" are selected. If any of these checkboxes are not selected, touch them so that a

checkmark appears.

When feeding from the inserter for pamphlet copying (page 5-6), cover or insert copying (page 5-12), or

transparency insert copying (page 5-23), select the inserter in the tray settings. The inserter attributes can also

be selected in the system settings (see page 2-18).

Part names

Specifications

Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.

Paper tray

Place blank or printed paper here to be inserted.

Paper guide

When loading paper, adjust this guide to the width of the paper.

Top cover

Open for misfeed removal.

Inserter operation panel

Stapling and punching can be performed directly

from the inserter operation panel without using the

machine operation panel.

Paper guide lever

Release the paper guide lock to remove misfed paper.

Front cover

Open this cover to remove misfed paper from the

finisher or saddle stitch finisher.

NOTE

To install the inserter...

An optional finisher or saddle stitch finisher must be installed (page 3-2).

Name Inserter (AR-CF2)

Paper weight 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 lbs. to 68* lbs.) *For index paper, equivalent to 140-lbs.

Paper types

Plain paper, special paper (transparency film, coloured paper, paper with punch holes,

tabbed paper, etc.)

(Consult your retailer for more information on special papers that can be used.)

Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13",

8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R

Paper capacity Max. 100 (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.))

Paper conveying Centre reference

Power supply Supplied from machine

Dimensions

When paper tray is folded up: 285 (565*) mm (W) x 585 mm (D) x 1120 mm (H)

(11-15/64" (22-1/4"*) (W) x 23-3/64" (D) x 44-7/64" (H))

Not including stopper (40 mm (1-37/64")) when attached to machine

* Including paper tray

Weight Approx. 24 kg (Approx. 53 lbs.)

INSERTER

3-15

Loading paper

When loading paper in the inserter, load the paper face up. If the paper has a top edge and bottom edge, load in

the same top-bottom orientation as the original. Adjust the paper guide on the paper tray to the width of the paper.

When using tabbed paper, place the paper as follows:

Load the paper back

side up.

The top side is

inserted first.

The relation of copies and tabbed sheets is shown below.

Manual operation of the inserter

The inserter can be used for stapling or punching without performing a copy operation. These functions are selected

at the operation panel of the inserter.

[PUNCH] key

When a punch module is installed on the finisher

or saddle stitch finisher, punch holes can be

added to blank paper or printed paper. The

indicator lights when this function is selected.

[STAPLE] key/indicator

When this function is selected, each set of output

is stapled and delivered to the finisher or saddle

stitch finisher tray. (Note that the sets are not

offset.) Press this key until the icon light of the

desired staple position lights up. (" " pamphlet

stapling can only be selected when a saddle stitch

finisher is installed)

[START] key/indicator

After selecting punch or staple settings with key

or key , place the paper to be punched or

stapled on the inserter tray and press this key.

Back side

Copy

Copy result

Load tabbed paper

Inserted first.

Back

side

1st sheet

4th sheet

1st sheet

Back

side

2nd sheet 3rd sheet 4th sheet 5th sheet

Back

side

Tabbed paper 4th sheet (back side)

Tabbed paper 1st sheet (back side)

5th sheet

Back

side

NOTES

●Do not use tabbed paper when operating the inserter manually.

●The punching and stapling functions cannot be used when the finisher or saddle stitch finisher has failed, or

when the functions are prohibited* in the administrator settings (page 11 of the administrator settings guide).

* Disabling of stapler/Disabling of punch/Disabling of finisher/Disabling of inserter

INSERTER

3-16

■Alarm display

If the [START] key indicator on the inserter operation panel is blinking and the [PUNCH] key or [STAPLE] key

indicator is also blinking or solidly lit, operation will not start when the [START] key is pressed. Resolve the

problem as indicated below, depending how the indicators are lit or blinking.

■Using the inserter

For paper sizes that can be stapled or punched, see the finisher and saddle stitch finisher specifications on

page 3-2.

Some paper types cannot be stapled or punched (see "NOTES" on page 3-3). Do not use these paper types.

1Load paper in the inserter.

Load the paper face up.

When performing

pamphlet stapling, place

the paper so that the

opened pages are face

up as shown.

Adjust the paper guide

to the size of the paper.

2Press the desired mode key.

Press key on page 3-15 for stapling or pamphlet

stapling. Press key on page 3-15 for punching.

The selected mode lights up.

3Press the [START] key.

Make sure that the

[START] key light is

illuminated green and

then press the [START]

key.

[PUNCH]

indicator [STAPLE] indicator [START]

indicator Cause Solution

Any one of the indicators is solidly lit. Blinks red A paper size that cannot

be fed has been loaded.

Use paper that is a suitable

size for punching, stapling, or

saddle stitching (page 3-3).

----

Solidly

lit

Blinks red The paper type of the

inserter is set to heavy

paper.

Heavy paper cannot be

used.

Blinking - - - - Blinks red

The finisher or saddle

stitch finisher tray is full. Remove the paper from

the tray.

The hole punch scrap

container in the punch

module on the finisher or

saddle stitch finisher is full.

Discard the hole punch

scrap (page 3-10).

Any one of the

indicators is blinking.

-Blinks red

The finisher or saddle

stitch finisher tray is full. Remove the paper from

the tray.

The finisher or saddle

stitch finisher is out of

staples.

Replace the staple

cartridge (page 3-7).

----

Blinking

Blinks red

The saddle stitch tray on

the saddle stitch finisher is

full.

Remove the paper from

the saddle stitch tray.

The saddle stitch finisher is

out of saddle stitch staples. Replace the saddle stitch

staple cartridge (page 3-

8).

Paper guide

NOTE

Pamphlet stapling can only be used when the saddle

stitch finisher (AR-F16) is installed.

When using pamphlet stapling, stapling and

punching cannot be used in combination.

INSERTER

3-17

Misfeed removal

When a misfeed occurs in the inserter, remove the misfed paper following the procedure below.

■Misfeed in the inserter

1Gently move the inserter away from the

machine while pressing the button.

2Remove the misfed paper from the main

unit.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

After removing the

misfed paper, perform

steps 1 and 3 on page 2-

24 to reset the machine.

3If misfed paper is not found in step 2, open

the top cover.

4Remove the misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

5If a misfeed was not found in step 4, raise

the paper guide lever.

6Remove the misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

7If a misfeed was not found in step 6,

remove the misfed paper from under the

paper guide.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

8Return the paper guide lever to its original

position.

9Push the finisher to close the gap between

the machine and the inserter.

After attaching the

inserter on the machine,

make sure that the paper

misfeed message has

been cleared and the

normal message display

appears.

INSERTER

3-18

Troubleshooting inserter problems

Check the list below before calling for service.

Problem Check Solution or cause

Stapling position is

not correct

(including saddle

stitch).

The desired staple mode is not selected. Select the desired staple mode at the

operation panel of the inserter (page 3-15).

The paper is not loaded in the correct

position. Load the paper correctly (page 3-16).

The paper is not loaded face up. Paper must be loaded face up in the inserter

tray (page 3-16).

The inserter does

not operate.

Are any inserter covers open? Close all covers.

"Disabling of inserter" is enabled in the

administrator settings.

Check the administrator settings and disable

"Disabling of inserter".

A paper misfeed message appears. Remove the misfed paper (page 3-17).

The [START] key light is not illuminated.

Make sure that the punch or staple key has

been selected on the operation panel of the

inserter (page 3-15).

Paper misfeed

occurs The paper is curled or damp.

Do not use curled or folded paper. When the

inserter is not going to be used for a long time,

remove the paper from the inserter, place it in

a bag so that it does not absorb moisture, and

store it in a cool and dark place.

A paper misfeed

occurs when paper

is fed from the

inserter.

Do the size and orientation of the loaded

paper match the paper size and orientation

set in "Setting the paper type and paper

size"?

Make sure paper size and orientation set in

"Setting the paper type and paper size" match

the size and orientation of the loaded paper.

A message appears

each time paper is

placed in the paper

tray of the inserter.

Was the [SIZE SELECT] key touched and

the size and orientation of the paper for the

inserter set as explained in "Setting the

paper type and paper size"?

To ensure that the correct paper (size and

orientation) is loaded in the inserter, the

machine indicates the current paper size

setting each time paper is placed in the paper

tray.

3-19

SHARP OSA

Sharp OSA (Open Systems Architecture) is an architecture that enables external applications to be directly

connected to a digital multifunction machine over a network.

When a digital multifunction machine that supports Sharp OSA is used, the operation panel controls and functions

of the machine such as scan send can be linked to an external application.

There are two types of external applications: "standard application" and "external account application". An "external

account application" is used for centralized account management of a multifunction machine on a network. A

"standard application" refers to all other applications.

APPLICATION COMMUNICATION

MODULE (MX-AMX2)

The application communication module is required to use a "standard application" on the machine.

When a previously registered standard application is selected in the Web pages of the machine, the machine

retrieves the operation screen from the registered URL. Control of the operation screen is performed by the standard

application, and Scan to FTP can be executed.

Standard application setup

To register a standard application in the machine's Web pages, click [External Applications] in the administrator menu

frame and then click [Standard Applications]. Configure settings for the standard application in the screen that

appears.

Selecting a standard application

There are two methods for selecting a standard application that has been registered in the machine's Web pages.

■Selecting a standard application from the job status screen

The Sharp OSA icon will appear in the lower left-hand corner of the job status screen. Follow the steps below to

select a standard application.

1Touch the Sharp OSA icon.

If no standard

applications have been

stored in the Web pages,

the key cannot be

touched.

2Select the standard application.

If two or more standard

applications have been

stored in the Web pages,

the screen to select the

standard application will

appear. Touch the

standard application that

you wish to use.

If only one standard application has been stored in

the Web pages, connection to the standard

application will begin.

3The machine connects to the standard

application.

The message "Connecting to the external

application." appears while the machine

communicates with the standard application.

App 04

App 03

App 02

App 01

APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MX-AMX2)

3-20

■Selecting the standard application from document filing mode

The [Sharp OSA] key appears in the upper right-hand corner of the document filing screen. Follow the steps

below to select a standard application.

1Touch the [Sharp OSA] key.

If no standard

applications have been

stored in the Web pages,

the key cannot be

touched.

2Select the standard application.

If one or more standard

applications have been

stored in the Web pages,

the screen to select the

standard application will

appear. Touch the

standard application that

you wish to use.

If only one standard application has been stored in

the Web pages, connection to the standard

application will begin.

3The machine connects to the standard

application.

The message "Connecting to the external

application." appears while the machine

communicates with the standard application.

Operation in OSA mode

When the application communication module is installed, it is possible to check the job log of OSA scan mode in the

job status screen. The procedure for displaying the job log is the same as for regular Scan to FTP.

To display the job log of OSA scan mode, touch the [SCAN] key once again while the job log of scan mode appears

in the job status screen. (When this is done, the name of the key will change to [OSA SCAN].) To return to the scan

screen from the OSA scan screen, touch the [OSA SCAN] key.

FILE RETRIEVE

Sharp OSA

QUICK FILE

FOLDER

FILE

FOLDER

App 04

App 03

App 02

App 01

3-21

EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3)

The external account module is required to use a "external account application" on the machine.

An external account application can be used in "external authentication mode" or "external count mode". When

external authentication mode is used, the login screen is retrieved from the application when the machine is started.

When a job ends, a job notification screen is sent to the application to enable counts to be kept for each authenticated

user.

When "external count mode" is used, the login screen is not displayed when the machine is started. Only a job result

notification is sent to the application. User authentication by the external account application cannot be used,

however, the external account application can be used in combination with the internal account function.

External account application setup

To register an external account application in the machine's Web pages, click [External Applications] in the

administrator menu frame and then click [External Accounting]. Configure settings for the external account

application in the screen that appears. To make the settings in the Web page take effect, restart the machine.

Operation in external account mode

The two modes for using an external account application operate as explained below.

■External authentication mode

When the [ENABLE AUTHENTICATION BY EXTERNAL SERVER] checkbox is selected in "External account

setting" of "Sharp OSA settings" in the administrator settings, the machine enters external authentication mode.

When the machine is powered on in external authentication mode, the machine accesses the external account

application and displays the login screen. The login screen also appears when the [CALL] key is touched to run

a job in the job status complete screen. (The login screen does not appear if the user has already logged in by

the normal method.)

The [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed while the login screen appears to show the job status screen. To return

to the previous state, press the mode select key.

■External count mode

When only the [ENABLE EXTERNAL ACCOUNT CONTROL] setting is enabled in "External account setting" of

"Sharp OSA settings" in the administrator settings, the machine enters external count mode.

Unlike external authentication mode, when the machine is started in "external count mode", the login screen of

the external account application is not displayed. Only the job result is sent to the external account application.

External count mode can be used together with the user control function of the machine. (External count mode

can also be used when the user control function is disabled.)

NOTES

●The user control function of the machine cannot be used in external authentication mode.

●The [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key can be pressed while the login screen appears to show the system settings

screen. To return to the initial state, touch the [EXIT] key.

If login fails

If the login screen fails to appear or the application does not operate correctly, the machine may also stop operating

correctly. In this event, it is recommended that you quit external account mode from the Web pages of the machine.

For more information, see [Help] in the Web pages.

If it is necessary to forcibly terminate external account mode using the operation panel of the machine, follow the

steps below.

Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key and change "External account setting" in the administrator settings (see page

14 of the administrator settings guide). After changing the setting, restart the machine.

Part 2: Copier Operation

4-1

CHAPTER 4

MAKING COPIES

This chapter explains the basic procedures for making copies, including

selection of the copy ratio and other copy settings.

Page

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER ...................................................... 4-2

●Acceptable originals........................................................................ 4-2

PLACING ORIGINALS............................................................................ 4-3

CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED ORIGINAL................................. 4-5

●Manually setting the scanning size ................................................. 4-5

STORING, DELETING, AND USING ORIGINAL SIZES ........................ 4-6

●Storing or deleting an original size.................................................. 4-6

NORMAL COPYING............................................................................... 4-7

●Making copies with the automatic document feeding function ........ 4-7

●Automatic two-sided copying using the automatic document feeding

function............................................................................................ 4-10

●Copying from the document glass................................................... 4-11

●Automatic two-sided copying from the document glass .................. 4-13

ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE .....................................................................4-14

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM................................................... 4-15

●Automatic selection (auto image).................................................... 4-15

●Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom).................................... 4-16

●XY ZOOM........................................................................................ 4-18

SPECIAL PAPERS.................................................................................. 4-20

4-2

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER

The automatic document feeding function automatically feeds originals into the machine, making continuous copying

possible. In addition, both sides of two-sided sheet originals can be simultaneously scanned. This function is

convenient when you have a large number of original pages to scan.

Acceptable originals

Up to 150 originals (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) of the same size, or an overall stack height of no more than 19.5 mm (49/64"),

can be loaded. Originals of mixed length can also be loaded together as long as they are the same width; however,

some special functions may not operate correctly.

■Size and weight of acceptable

originals

■Total number of originals that can be

set in the document feeder tray

●Maximum of 150 sheets (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) or

total stack height of 19.5 mm (49/64") or less.

■Notes on use of the automatic document feeder

●Use originals within the specified size and weight ranges. Use of originals out of the specified range may cause

an original misfeed.

●Before loading originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips.

●If originals have damp spots from correction fluid, ink or glue from pasteups, be sure they are dried before they

are fed. If not, the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may be soiled.

●Do not use the following originals. These originals may cause incorrect original size detection, original

misfeeds, and smudges on copies.

●Transparency film, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink

ribbon should not be fed through the document feeder. Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be

damaged, crumpled or folded or have loosely pasted paper on them or cutouts in them. Originals with multiple

punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole punched paper may not feed correctly.

●When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that the

punched edge is at a position other than the feed slot.

Original size:

(148 x 210 mm)

A5 or

5-1/2" x 8-1/2" A3 or

11" x 17"

(297 x 420 mm)

Weight (thickness):

50g/m

or 14 lbs.

128 g/m

or 42 lbs.

g/m

... Weight of a sheet of paper of 1 m

Special heavy papers

(176 g/m (65 lbs.), 205 g/m (110 lbs.)) can be used.

Hole positions

Hole

positions

Hole positions

4-3

PLACING ORIGINALS

■Using the automatic document

feeder

1Open the document cover, make sure that

an original has not been left on the

document glass, and then gently close the

document cover.

2Adjust the original guides to the size of the

originals.

3Place the originals face up in the

document feeder tray.

Place the originals face

up.

Insert the originals all

the way into the

document feeder. The

stack height must not be

higher than the indicator

line (maximum of 150 pages).

■Using the document glass

Open the document cover, place the

original face down on the document glass,

and then gently close the document cover.

●Align the corner of the original with the tip of the

arrow mark on the document glass scale.

●Place the original in the appropriate position for its

size as shown above.

NOTES

●After placing the original, be sure to close the

document cover. If left open, parts outside of the

original will be copied black, causing excessive

use of toner.

●Do not place any objects under the original size

detector, because they may damage it or the

original size may not be detected properly.

A4 or 8½x11

B4 or

8½x14

A3 or 11x17

A4 or 8½x11

Document glass scale

mark

Document glass scale

mark

NOTE

Original size detection function

One of the four groups of standard original sizes shown below can be selected for detection by the original size

detection function. The factory default setting is "AB-2". The setting can be changed using "ORIGINAL SIZE

DETECTOR SETTING" in the administrator settings.

Group

Detectable original sizes

Document feeder tray (for reversing automatic document feeding)

Document glass

1 AB-1 A3, A4, A4R, A5,B4, B5, B5R Document glass + 8-1/2" x 11", 216x330

2 AB-2 A3, A4, A4R, A5,B5, B5R, 216x330 Document glass + 8-1/2" x 11", B4

INCH-1 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11",

8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" Document glass + A4

INCH-2 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11",

8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" Document glass + A4

PLACING ORIGINALS

4-4

■Standard original placement orientations

Place originals in the

document feeder tray or on

the document glass so that

the top and bottom of the

original is positioned as

shown in the illustration. If not,

staples will be incorrectly

positioned and some special

features may not give the

expected result.

■Automatic copy image rotation - rotation copying

If the orientation of the originals and copy paper are different, the original image will be automatically rotated 90°

and copied. (When an image is rotated, a message will be displayed.) If a function is selected that is not suitable

for rotation, such as enlarging the copy to greater than A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size or staple sorting with the saddle

stitch finisher, rotation will not be possible.

[Example]

●This function operates in both the auto paper select or auto image mode. ("Rotation copy setting" can be

disabled in the administrator settings. See page 16 of the administrator settings guide.)

Document feeder tray Document glass

[Example 1]

[Example 2]

Orientation of original Orientation of paper Copy after rotation

Face down Face down

4-5

CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED

ORIGINAL

If the placed original is a standard size, the size will be automatically

detected (automatic original detection function) and displayed in the touch

panel. Make sure that the correct size has been detected.

(A) :The original size is displayed.

(B) :[AUTO] appears when the automatic original detection function is

operating.

If you have loaded a non-standard size original or wish to change the

scanning size, you can follow the steps below to manually set the original

scanning size. (For the standard sizes, see "Original size detection

function" on page 4-3.)

Manually setting the scanning size

If you load an original that is not a standard size (such as an INCH size), or if the size is not detected correctly, you

must touch the [ORIGINAL] key and set the original size manually. Perform the following steps after placing the

document in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.

1Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.

2Touch the desired original size key.

[AUTO] is no longer

highlighted. [MANUAL]

and the original size key

you touched are

highlighted.

If you wish to select an INCH size, touch

the [AB/INCH] key and then touch the

desired original size key.

[INCH] is highlighted

and INCH size keys are

displayed. To return to

the AB palette, touch the

[AB/INCH] key once

again.

If a non-standard size original is placed in

the document feeder or on the document

glass, touch the [SIZE INPUT] tab and then

enter the X (width) and Y (length)

dimensions of the original.

X is initially selected.

Enter the X dimension

(width) and then touch

the Y( ) key and enter

the Y dimension (length).

X can be from 64 to 432

mm, and Y can be from

64 to 297 mm.

If you frequently use originals that are the same

non-standard size, you can store the size as

explained in "STORING, DELETING, AND USING

ORIGINAL SIZES"on the following page. This will

save you the trouble of manually entering the size

each time you use that original size.

3Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the initial screen.

4The selected original size appears in the

top half of the [ORIGINAL] key.

AUTO

ORIGINAL

EXPOSURE

(B)(A)

NOTE

If a non-standard size original is loaded (including special sizes), the closest standard size may be displayed,

or the original size may not appear at all.

If "CANCEL DETECTION AT DOCUMENT GLASS" is enabled in the administrator settings (see page 11 of the

administrator settings guide), automatic original detection at the document glass will not operate. In this case,

follow the steps below to manually set the original scanning size.

AUTO

ORIGINAL

EXPOSURE

A5R

STANDARD SIZE SIZE INPUT

INCH

A4R

B5R

STANDARD SIZE SIZE INPUT

INCH

5X8

5X8R

8X11

8X13

8X14

X17

2 1

(64 297)

(64 432)

STANDARD SIZE SIZE INPUT

420

297

AUTO

ORIGINAL

EXPOSURE

8X11

4-6

STORING, DELETING, AND USING

ORIGINAL SIZES

Up to 9 special original sizes can be stored. Stored sizes can be easily called up and are not erased if the power is

turned off. Storing a frequently used original size saves you the trouble of manually setting the size each time you

copy that size of document.

●To cancel an original size storing, using, or deleting operation, touch the [ORIGINAL] key on the screen.

Storing or deleting an original size

1Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.

2Touch the [CUSTOM SIZE] key.

3Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.

4Touch the original size key ( ) that

you wish to store or delete.

To store an original size,

touch a key that does not

show a size ( ).

Keys that already have

an original size stored

will show the stored size

().

To delete or change a stored size, touch the key

that shows the size that you wish to delete or

change.

●If you are storing an original size, go to step 5.

●To delete or change an original size, go to

step 7.

5Enter the X (width) and Y (length)

dimensions of the original with the

keys.

X (width) is initially

selected.

Enter X and then touch

the ( ) key to enter Y.

A width of 64 to 432 mm

can be entered in X, and

a length of 64 to 297 mm

can be entered in Y.

6Touch the [OK] key.

The original size entered in step 5 is stored in the

key selected in step 4.

To exit, touch the [ORIGINAL] key.

7When you touch a key that shows an

original size in step 4, a message screen

appears that contains the keys [CANCEL],

[DELETE], and [STORE].

●To cancel the procedure, touch the [CANCEL]

key.

●To delete the selected original size, touch the

[DELETE] key.

●To change the original size stored in the key,

touch the [STORE] key. The screen of step 5

will appear to let you change the size.

8To exit, touch the [ORIGINAL] key.

■USING A STORED ORIGINAL SIZE

1Follow steps 1 to 2 of "STORING OR

DELETING AN ORIGINAL SIZE".

2Touch the original size key that you wish

to use.

3Touch the [OK] key.

The stored original size is called up.

AUTO

ORIGINAL

EXPOSURE

AUTO

E INPUT

CUSTOM

SIZE

EXPOSURE

PAPER SELE

COPY RATI

100%

AUTO

AUTO A4

MANUAL

AUTO

INCH

LL STORE/DELETE

CUSTO

SIZE

MANUA

AUTO

RECALL STORE/DELETE

X68 Y78

CANCEL OK

420

297

(64 432)

RECALL

STORE/DELETE

(64 297)

RECALL STORE/DELETE

X68 Y78

4-7

NORMAL COPYING

This section describes the normal copying procedure.

Making copies with the automatic document feeding

function

■1-sided copies of 1-sided originals

1Place the originals in the document feeder

tray. (pages 4-3 to 4-6)

2Ensure that the 1-sided to 1-sided copy

mode is selected.

The one-sided to one-

sided mode is selected

when no icon for a two-

sided mode appears in

the dashed area on the

display. If the 1-sided to

1-sided copy mode is

already selected, steps 3 to 5 are not needed.

3Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.

4Touch the [1-sided to 1-sided copy] key.

Touch the [1-sided to 1-

sided copy] key.

5Touch the [OK] key.

6Ensure that paper of the same size as the

originals is automatically selected*.

The selected tray will be

highlighted or the

message "LOAD xxxxxx

PAPER." will appear. If

the message appears,

load paper in a paper

tray with paper of the

required size.

Even if the message above appears, copying can

be performed onto the currently selected paper.

*The following requirements must be satisfied.

Originals of a standard size (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,

B5R or A5 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-

1/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2R")) are set and the

auto paper select function is enabled.

If originals of a size other

than the sizes above are

to be copied, manually

select the desired paper

size by touching the

[PAPER SELECT] key

and then touching the

desired paper size selection key.

The selected key will be highlighted and the paper

selection screen will close. To close the paper

selection screen without making a selection, touch

the [PAPER SELECT] key.

Original Copy

B5 A4

ORIGINAL A4

123

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

AUTO

100%

PAPER SELECT

EXPOSURE

PLAIN

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

1. A4

PLAIN PLAIN PLAIN

PLAIN PLAIN

3. B4

4. A3

2. B5

5. A4

NORMAL COPYING

4-8

7Select the desired output mode (page 4-9).

The sort mode is the

default mode.

To select the group

mode, touch the

[OUTPUT] key, then

touch the [GROUP] key

on the output setting

screen, and then touch the [OK] key on the setting

screen.

8Use the numeric keys to set the desired

number of copies.

Up to 999 can be set.

If you are only making a

single copy, the copy can

be made with the copy

number display showing

"0". Use the [C] (clear)

key to cancel an entry if

a mistake has been made.

9Press the [START] key.

If the [C] key is pressed

while originals are being

scanned, scanning will

stop. If copying had

already started, copying

and scanning will stop

after the original in

progress is output to the original exit area. In these

cases the copy quantity will be reset to "0".

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

FILE

LOGOUT

NOTES

●The 1-sided to 1-sided copying mode is set as the

default in the initial settings. If the default setting

has not been changed using the "Initial status

settings" (administrator settings), steps 3 to 5 on

page 4-7 can be omitted.

To cancel copying...

To cancel a copy job in progress, press the [CA]

key. A confirmation message will appear. Touch

the [YES] key to cancel copying.

NORMAL COPYING

4-9

■Copy output (sort and group)

Example: Making five sets or five copies each of three originals

●Sorting copies into sets

●Grouping copies by page

■Selecting the output tray (when an optional finisher or saddle stitch finisher is

installed)

When the [FINISHER TRAY] key is highlighted, output pages are delivered to the finisher tray of the finisher or

saddle stitch finisher. When the "CENTRE TRAY" key is highlighted, output pages are delivered to the centre

tray. Touch the appropriate key to select the desired output tray.

This screen appears when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.

The screen that appears when a finisher is installed is slightly different.

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

LOGOUT

OUTPUT

SORT

GROUP

Original

Press the [START]

key

Set the

number of

copies (5)

Touch the

[OUTPUT] key Touch the

[SORT] key

Five sets of copies

When using the automatic document feeding function,

sorting is automatically selected when the original is placed

in the document feeder.

LOGOUT

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

SORT

GROUP

Press the [START]

key

Set the

number of

copies (5)

Touch the

[OUTPUT] key Touc h the

[GROUP] key

"Group" is automatically selected when the

original is placed on the document glass.

5 copies per page

Original

OUTPUT

SORT

GROUP

STAPLE

SORT

PUNCH

SADDLE

STITCH

FINISHER

TRAY CENTRE

TRAY

OFFSET

NORMAL COPYING

4-10

Automatic two-sided copying using the automatic

document feeding function

The machine can automatically copy two-sided originals, saving you the trouble of manually turning over each

original page.

1. Automatic two-sided copying from one-sided

originals

2. Automatic two-sided copying from two-sided

originals

3. Automatic one-sided copying from two-sided

originals

1Place the originals in the document feeder

tray. (pages 4-3 to 4-6)

2Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.

3Select the desired copy mode.

The display will vary

depending on the

equipment installed.

When making automatic two-sided copies of a

one-sided A3 (11" x 17") or B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size

portrait original, or when you wish to invert the top

and bottom of the back side of a two-sided original,

touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.

4Touch the [OK] key.

Perform steps 6 through 9 on pages 4-7 and 4-8.

Original Copy

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

If a copy key is touched for a mode that cannot

be selected, a double beep will sound.

ED COPY

Example of a

portrait-oriented

original

Example of a

landscape-oriented

original

BINDING

NORMAL COPYING

4-11

Copying from the document glass

When copying originals which cannot be fed from the automatic document feeder such as thick originals, open the

document cover and copy the originals from the document glass.

■1-sided copies of 1-sided originals

1Place the original on the document glass.

(pages 4-3 to 4-6)

●Align the corner of the original with the tip of the

arrow mark on the document glass scale.

●Place the original in the appropriate position for its

size as shown above.

2Ensure that the 1-sided to 1-sided copy

mode is selected.

The one-sided to one-

sided mode is selected

when no icon for a two-

sided mode appears in

the dashed area on the

display. If an icon

appears, perform steps

3 to 5 on page 4-7 and then go to step 3.

3Ensure that paper of the same size as the

original is automatically selected*.

The selected tray will be

highlighted or the

message "LOAD xxxxxx

PAPER." will appear. If

the message appears,

load paper in a paper

tray with paper of the

required size.

Even if the message above is displayed, copying

can be performed onto the currently selected

paper.

* The following requirements must be satisfied.

Originals of a standard size (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,

B5R or A5 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-

1/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)) are set and the

auto paper select function is enabled.

If originals of a size other

than the sizes above are

to be copied, manually

select the desired paper

size by touching the

[PAPER SELECT] key

and then touching the

desired paper size selection key.

The selected key will be highlighted and the paper

selection screen will close. To close the paper

selection screen without making a selection, touch

the [PAPER SELECT] key.

Original Copy

A4 or 8½x11

B4 or

8½x14

A3 or 11x17

A4 or 8½x11

Document glass scale

mark

Document glass scale

mark

ORIGINAL A4

111

222

AUTO

100%

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

EXPOSURE

PLAIN

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

1. A4

PLAIN PLAIN PLAIN

PLAIN PLAIN

3. B4

4. A3

2. B5

5. A4

NORMAL COPYING

4-12

4Select the desired output mode. (page 4-

9.)

Group mode is the

default mode.

To select sort mode,

touch the [OUTPUT]

key, touch the [SORT]

key in the screen that

appears, and then touch

the [OK] key.

5Use the numeric keys to set the desired

number of copies.

Up to 999 can be set.

If you are only making a

single copy, the copy can

be made with the copy

number display showing

"0".

Use the [C] (clear) key to

cancel an entry if a mistake has been made.

6Press the [START] key.

Replace the original with

the next original and

press the [START] key.

Repeat this operation

until all originals have

been scanned.

If you selected "Sort" for

the output mode in step 4 and pressed the

[START] key, it is necessary to touch the [READ-

END] key.

7Touch the [READ-END] key.

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

FILE

LOGOUT

To cancel copying...

To cancel a copy job in progress, press the [CA] key.

A confirmation message will appear. Touch the

[YES] key to cancel copying.

READ-END

PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].

WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].

NORMAL COPYING

4-13

Automatic two-sided copying from the document glass

The following two-sided copying function is possible. The copy paper is turned over automatically, allowing easy two-

sided copying.

1Place an original on the document glass.

(pages 4-3 to 4-6)

●Align the corner of the original with the tip of the

arrow mark on the document glass scale.

●Place the original in the appropriate position for its

size as shown above.

2Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.

3Touch the [1-sided to 2-sided copy] key.

When making automatic two-sided copies of a

one-sided A3 (11" x 17") or B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size

portrait original, or when you wish to invert the top

and bottom of the back side of a two-sided original,

touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.

4Touch the [OK] key.

Perform steps 3 to 7 on pages 4-11 and 4-12.

Original Copy

A4 or 8½x11

B4 or

8½x14

A3 or 11x17

A4 or 8½x11

Document glass scale

mark

Document glass scale

mark

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

Example of a

portrait-oriented

original

Example of a

landscape-oriente

original

BINDING

4-14

ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE

Select an appropriate exposure mode for the original to be copied. The selections are AUTO, TEXT, TEXT/PHOTO

and PHOTO.

■Automatic exposure adjustment

The default exposure

setting is "AUTO", which

automatically adjusts

the exposure for the

original. To select the

exposure mode, or to

manually adjust the

exposure level, follow the steps below.

■Selecting the exposure mode and manually adjusting the exposure level

1Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.

2Select [TEXT], [TEXT/PHOTO] or [PHOTO]

as appropriate for the original to be

copied.

To select [TEXT], touch the [AUTO MANUAL]

key so that [MANUAL] is selected.

3Adjust the exposure level.

Touch the key to

make darker copies.

Touch the key to

make lighter copies.

AUTO

AUTO A4

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

EXPOSURE

Exposure modes selection

TEXT: This mode is useful for producing

dark text copies with minimum

background.

TEXT/PHOTO: This provides the best balance for

copying an original which contains

both text and photos. This mode is

also useful for copying printed

photographs.

PHOTO: This mode provides the best copies

of photographs with fine details.

AUTO

AUTO A4

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

EXPOSURE

ORIGINAL

IMAGE TYPE

TEXT AUTO MANUAL

531

TEXT/PHOTO

PHOTO

AUTO

AUTO A4

100%

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

EXPOSURE

NOTE

Exposure levels in TEXT mode

1 to 2: Dark originals such as newspaper

3: Normal density originals

4 to 5: Originals written with pencils or light colour

characters

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

NOTES

●To return to the automatic exposure mode, touch

the [AUTO / MANUAL] key to highlight [AUTO],

and then touch the [OK] key.

●The exposure level used in automatic exposure

mode can be adjusted in the administrator

settings. See "Exposure adjustment" on page 16

of the administrator settings guide.

AUTO MANUAL

135

4-15

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM

Reduction and enlargement ratios can be selected automatically or manually.

●Automatic selection: Auto image (see below)

●Manual selection: Preset copy ratios/zoom (see page 4-16)

Automatic selection (auto image)

The reduction or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically based on the original size and the selected paper size.

1Place the original in the document feeder

tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3

to 4-6)

The detected original size will be displayed.

2Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and then

select the desired paper size.

The selected paper size

key is highlighted and

the paper selection

screen closes.

3Touch the [AUTO IMAGE] key.

The [AUTO IMAGE] key

will be highlighted and

the best reduction or

enlargement ratio for the

original size and the

selected paper size will

be selected and

displayed in the copy ratio display.

4Use the numeric keys to set the desired

number of copies.

Up to 999 can be set.

If you are only making a

single copy, the copy can

be made with the copy

number display showing

"0".

Use the [C] (clear) key to

cancel an entry if a mistake has been made.

5Press the [START] key.

If you placed the original

on the document glass,

set the output mode to

"Sort", and pressed the

[START] key, you must

touch the [READ-END]

key after all pages of the

original have been scanned. (Step 7 on page 4-12)

NOTE

Automatic ratio adjustment can only be used for the

following original and paper sizes. It cannot be used

for other sizes. However, in the case of non-standard

original and paper sizes, the sizes can be entered to

make automatic ratio adjustment possible for those

sizes.

Original sizes:Standard sizes (see "Original size

detection function" on page 4-3.)

Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or A5R

(11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-

1/2" x 11"R, or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)

NOTE

If paper of the desired size is not loaded in any tray,

load paper of the required size in a paper tray or the

bypass tray. (See "Setting the paper type and paper

size" on page 2-14.)

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

1. A4

PLAIN PLAIN PLAIN

HEAVY PAPER

PLAIN PLAIN

3. A4

4. A3

2. B5

5. A4

NOTE

If the message "ROTATE ORIGINAL FROM TO

" is displayed, change the orientation of the

original as indicated in the message. When the

message above is displayed, copying can be done

without changing the orientation, but the image will

not fit the paper correctly.

To cancel the auto image mode, touch the [CA] key.

5. A4

AUTO

IMAGE

GE 122%

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

LOGOUT

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM

4-16

Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom)

Five preset enlargement and five preset reduction copy ratios (max. 400%, min. 25%) can be selected. In addition,

the zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.

<The administrator settings on page 16 of the administrator settings guide can be used to set two additional

enlargement ratios and two additional reduction ratios.>

1Place the original in the document feeder

tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3

to 4-6)

2Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.

3Use the [MENU] key to select menu " " or

menu " " for copy ratio selection.

●A.Preset reduction copy ratios are:

70%, 81% and 86% (for the AB system).

77% and 64% (for the inch system).

●

B.Preset enlargement copy ratios are:

115%, 122% and 141% (for the AB system).

121% and 129% (for the inch system).

●A.Preset reduction copy ratios are:

50% and 25%.

●B.Preset enlargement copy ratios are:

200% and 400%.

(The custom ratios set by the administrator appear

in ratio menu 2.)

4Use the reduction, enlargement, and

[ZOOM] keys on the touch panel to set the

desired copy ratio.

Zoom ratios: Any ratio

from 25% to 400% can

be set in 1% increments.

Touch the [ ] key to

increase the ratio, or the

[ ] key to decrease

the ratio. (If you continue

to touch the [ ]/[ ] key, the ratio will change

automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will

change rapidly.)

5Touch the [OK] key.

NOTE

When the original is placed in the document feeder,

the ratio can be set from 25% to 200%.

AUTO

100%

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

AUTO

AUTO A4

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

AUTO

IMAGE

EXPOSURE

XY ZOOM MENU

ZOOM

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

AUTO

AUTO A4

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

AUTO

IMAGE

EXPOSURE

XY ZOOM

ZOOM

NOTES

●Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set the

approximate ratio, then touch the [ ] key to

increase the ratio or the [ ] key to decrease the

ratio.

●Automatic changing of the ratio when a zoom key

is continuously touched can be disabled in the

administrator settings (see "Key operation setting

(prohibit key repeat)" on page 10 of the

administrator settings guide).

●If the message "IMAGE IS LARGER THAN COPY

PAPER." appears when a ratio is selected, the

image may not fit on the copy paper.

●To set the horizontal and vertical copy ratios

separately, use the XY ZOOM feature. See page

4-18.

XY ZOOM MENU

ZOOM

XY ZOOM MENU

ZOOM

AUTO

AUTO A4

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

AUTO

IMAGE

EXPOSURE

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM

4-17

6Make sure that an appropriate paper size

has been selected based on the selected

ratio.

Auto paper select display

7Use the numeric keys to set the desired

number of copies.

Up to 999 can be set.

If you are only making a

single copy, the copy can

be made with the copy

number display showing

"0".

Use the [C] (clear) key to

cancel an entry if a mistake has been made.

8Press the [START] key.

If you placed the original

on the document glass,

set the output to "Sort",

and pressed the

[START] key, you must

touch the [READ-END]

key after all pages of the

original have been scanned. (Step 7 on page 4-12)

NOTE

If the auto paper select display does not appear, a

tray with the correct size of paper for the selected

ratio will not be automatically selected.

AUTO

86%

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

EXPOSURE

LOGOUT

To return the ratio to 100%

To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [COPY

RATIO] key to display the ratio menu and then touch

the [100%] key. (Steps 2 and 3 on page 4-16.)

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM

4-18

XY ZOOM

The XY ZOOM feature allows the horizontal and vertical copy ratios to be changed separately. The ratios can be set

from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.

Example: Selecting 100% for the length and 50% for the width

1Place the original in the document feeder

tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3

to 4-6)

2Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.

3Touch the [XY ZOOM] key.

4Touch the [X] key.

The initial state of the [X]

key is selected

(highlighted), so this

step normally is not

necessary. Touch the [X]

key only if it is not

highlighted yet.

5Use the reduction, enlargement, and

ZOOM ([ ], [ ]) keys to change the

copy ratio in the horizontal (X) direction.

A fixed ratio key will not

become highlighted

when touched.

Zoom ratios: Any ratio

from 25% to 400% can

be set in 1% increments.

Touch the [ ] key to

increase the ratio, or the

[ ] key to decrease

the ratio. (If you continue

to touch the [ ]/[ ] key, the ratio will change

automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will

change rapidly.)

6Touch the [Y] key.

Original Copy

NOTE

When the original is placed in the document feeder,

the ratio can be set from 25% to 200%.

AUTO

100%

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

XY ZOOM MENU

ZOOM

100

NOTES

●Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set the

approximate ratio, then touch the [ ] key to

increase the ratio or the [ ] key to decrease the

ratio.

●Automatic changing of the ratio when a zoom key

is continuously touched can be disabled in the

administrator settings (see "Key operation setting

(prohibit key repeat)" on page 10 of the

administrator settings guide).

XY ZOOM

ZOOM

50%

10Y

64%

ZOOM

100

ZOOM

100Y

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM

4-19

7Use the reduction, enlargement, and

ZOOM ([ ], [ ]) keys to change the

copy ratio in the vertical (Y) direction.

A fixed ratio key will not

become highlighted

when touched.

The zoom keys can be

used to change the ratio

from 25% to 400% in

increments of 1%.

If needed, you can touch

the [X] key once again to

readjust the X zoom.

8Touch the [OK] key.

9If needed, touch the [PAPER SELECT] key

and select the paper size.

If the AUTO PAPER

SELECT mode is on, the

appropriate copy paper

size will have been

automatically selected

based on the original

size and selected copy

ratios.

Select any desired copy settings such as

the exposure or number of copies, and

then press the [START] key.

ZOOM

50%

70Y

64%

70%

XY ZOOM CANCEL

ZOOM

70Y

400%

200% 100%

141%

AUTO

X-50% Y-70%

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

EXPOSURE

N PLAIN

APER

NPLAIN

To cancel an X or Y zoom setting...

Touch the [XY ZOOM] key or the [CANCEL] key in

the ratio selection screen (step 3 or 5 on page 4-18).

4-20

SPECIAL PAPERS

Special papers including transparency film, postcards and tabbed paper must be fed through the bypass tray.

1Place the original in the document feeder

tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3

to 4-6)

2Load the special paper in the bypass tray.

See page 2-12 for the

specifications of paper

that can be used in the

bypass tray.

For the paper loading

instructions, see

"Loading paper in the

bypass tray" (page 2-

10).

3Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key.

4Set the type and size of paper loaded in the

bypass tray.

The (X) key shows the

currently selected

paper type.

The (Y) key shows the

size of paper loaded

in the bypass tray.

To change the displayed paper type, touch the

(X) key before touching the (Y) key. When

loading paper, if you changed the paper size

from an AB size to an inch size (or from an inch

size to an AB size), or if you changed the paper

type, be sure to change the paper type and size

settings as explained in steps 5 to 7 on page 2-

14, and steps 8 to 10 on page 2-15.

5Select the bypass tray.

6Select any desired copy settings such as

the exposure or number of copies, and

then press the [START] key.

When copying from the

document glass in the

sort mode using the

[START] key, touch the

[READ-END] key after

all originals have been

scanned (step 7 on page

4-12).

AUTO

100%

PAPER SELECT

COPY

EXPOSURE

AUTO

100%

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

EXPOSURE

N HEAVY PAPER

APER

NPLAIN

5. A4

(X) (Y)

AUTO

100%

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

EXPOSURE

N HEAVY PAPER

PAPER

NPLAIN

5-1

CHAPTER 5

CONVENIENT COPY

FUNCTIONS

This chapter explains special-purpose functions, storing of copy

settings, and other convenient functions. Please select and read

sections of this chapter as needed.

Page

SPECIAL MODES................................................................................... 5-2

●General procedure for using special functions................................ 5-2

●Margin shift...................................................................................... 5-3

●Erase............................................................................................... 5-4

●Dual page copy ............................................................................... 5-5

●Pamphlet copy................................................................................. 5-6

●Job build.......................................................................................... 5-8

●Tandem copy................................................................................... 5-10

●Covers/inserts ................................................................................. 5-12

●Transparency film with insert sheets ............................................... 5-23

●Multi shot......................................................................................... 5-24

●Book copy ....................................................................................... 5-26

●Tab copy.......................................................................................... 5-27

●Card shot......................................................................................... 5-29

●Mirror image.................................................................................... 5-31

●B/W reverse..................................................................................... 5-31

●Print menu....................................................................................... 5-32

STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB PROGRAMS......................... 5-44

●Storing a job program...................................................................... 5-44

●Calling up a job program................................................................. 5-45

●Deleting a stored job program......................................................... 5-45

INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN.............................................................. 5-46

5-2

SPECIAL MODES

Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main screen of copy mode to open the special modes screen. The following

functions can be selected in the special modes screen.

Margin shift (page 5-3)

Erase (page 5-4)

Dual page copy (page 5-5)

Pamphlet copy (page 5-6)

Job build (page 5-8)

Tandem copy (page 5-10)

[OK] key on the special modes screen

Touch the [OK] key to return to the main screen of

copy mode.

/ key

Touch these keys to change the special modes

screen.

There are three special modes screens.

Touch the key to change to the other two screens.

●The following special functions can be selected in the 2nd screen (2/3).

Covers/inserts (page 5-12)

Transparency inserts (page 5-23)

Multi shot (page 5-24)

Book copy (page 5-26)

Tab copy (page 5-27)

Card shot (page 5-29)

●The following special functions can be selected in the 3rd screen (3/3).

Mirror image (page 5-31)

Print menu (page 5-32)

B/W reverse (page 5-31)

General procedure for using special functions

1Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.

2Touch the key for the desired special

mode.

Example:

Selecting the margin

shift function

To select a special function in one of the other two

screens, use the / keys to change the

screen.

SPECIAL MODES

MARGIN SHIFT

PAMPHLET COPY

ERASE

1/3

DUAL PAGE

COPY

JOB

BUILD

TANDEM

COPY

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

QUICK FILE

FILE

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

AUTO

100%

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

EXPOSURE

ORIGINAL

Touch the [SPECIAL MODES]

key in the main screen.

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

SPECIAL MODES

MARGIN SHIFT

PAMPHLET COPY

ERASE

JOB

BUILD

Setting procedures for modes requiring setting

screens start on the next page.

The dual page copy, job build, tandem copy,

mirror image and B/W reverse functions do not

require setting screens.

SPECIAL MODES

5-3

Margin shift

The margin shift function will automatically shift the text or image on the copy paper approximately 10 mm (1/2") in

its initial setting.

This function is convenient when stapling or binding copies with a string.

1Touch the [MARGIN SHIFT] key on the

special modes screen.

The margin shift setting

screen will appear.

The margin shift icon

( ) will also appear in

the upper left of the

screen to indicate that

the function is turned on.

2Select the shift direction.

Touch a shift direction

key to select right or left.

The selected key will be

highlighted.

3Set the shift amount as needed and touch

the [OK] key.

Use the and the

keys to set the shift

amount. The shift

amount can be set from

0 to 20 mm in 1 mm (0"

to 1" in 1/8") increments.

4Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

NOTE

The initial setting for the margin width can be changed in the administrator settings to any value from 0 to 20 mm

(0" to 1") (page 16 of the administrator settings guide).

Image shifted

to the right Image shifted

to the left

Margin

Original

Two-sided copying

Image shifted

to the right

Margin

Image shifted

to the left

Margin

One-sided copying

Original

●The shift direction can be selected from right or left

shift as shown in the illustration.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

SPECIAL MODES

MARGIN SHIFT

PAMPHLET COPY

ERASE

JOB

BUILD

RIGHT LEFT

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

To cancel the margin shift function, touch the

[CANCEL] key on the margin shift setting screen

(step 3).

SIDE 1

(0 20)

(0 1)

SIDE 2

OKCANCEL

10 10

SPECIAL MODES

5-4

Erase

The erase function is used to erase the shadow lines on copies produced when copying thick originals or books. The

erase modes that can be selected are shown below. The erase width is approximately 10 mm (1/2") in it's initial

setting.

EDGE ERASE

Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of

copies caused when heavy paper or a book is used

as an original.

CENTRE ERASE

Eliminates shadow lines produced by the bindings

of bound documents.

EDGE + CENTRE ERASE

Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of copies

and eliminates the shadow at the centre of copies.

1Touch the [ERASE] key on the special

modes screen.

The erase setting screen

will appear.

The erase icon ( ) will

also appear in the upper

left of the screen to

indicate that the function

is turned on.

2Select the desired erase mode.

Select one of the three

erase modes. The

selected key will be

highlighted.

3Adjust the amount of erase and touch the

[OK] key.

Use the and keys

to set the erase width to

any value from 0 to 10

mm in increments of

1 mm (0" to 1" in 1/8").

4Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

NOTE

The initial setting for the erasure width can be changed in the administrator settings to any value from 0 to 20 mm

(0" to 1") (page 16 of the administrator settings guide).

Original Copy

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

MODES

RGIN SHIFT

PHLET COPY

ERASE DUAL

JOB

BUILD

TAN

EDGE

ERASE

CENTRE

ERASE

EDGE+CENTRE

ERASE

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

NOTE

When erase is used, edge erase takes place at the

edges of the original image. If you also use a ratio

setting, the edge erase width will change according

to the set ratio.

To cancel the erase function, touch the [CANCEL]

key on the erase setting screen (step 3).

EDGE

CANCEL OK

(0 20)

SPECIAL MODES

5-5

Dual page copy

The dual page copy function produces separate copies of two documents placed side by side on the document glass.

This function is especially useful when copying books and other bound documents.

[Example] Copying right and left pages of a book

1Touch the [DUAL PAGE COPY] key on the

special modes screen.

The [DUAL PAGE

COPY] key will be

highlighted to indicate

that the function is

turned on, and the dual

page copy icon ( ) will

appear in the upper left

of the screen.

2Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

3Place the originals on the document glass.

When copying a thick

book, press down lightly

on the book to flatten it

against the document

glass.

Place the opened original on the document glass so

that the first page you wish to copy is on the right and

the centre of the original is aligned with the size mark.

4Ensure that A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size paper is

selected.

If A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size

paper is not selected,

touch the [PAPER

SELECT] key to select

A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size

paper.

●The dual page copy function can be used only

when copying from the document glass. The

automatic document feeder cannot be used with

this function.

●Only 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) paper can be used.

Book original Dual page copy

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

RASE

1/3

DUAL PAGE

COPY

JOB

BUILD

TANDEM

COPY

Index

Centre line of

original

This page

is copied

first.

8 " x 11"

A4(8 " x 11")

(8 " x 14")

A3 (11" x 17")

About the steps that follow

For two-sided copying, follow steps 2 through 4

on page 4-13 and then follow steps 4 through 6

on page 4-12.

For one-sided copying, follow steps 4 through 6

on page 4-12.

NOTE

To erase shadows caused by document binding, use

the edge erase function (page 5-4). (Centre Erase

and Edge + Centre Erase cannot be used in

combination.)

To cancel the dual page copy function, touch the

[DUAL PAGE COPY] key on the special modes

screen (screen of step 1).

PAPER SELECT

AUTO A4

100%

SPECIAL MODES

5-6

Pamphlet copy

The pamphlet copy function is used to arrange copies in proper order for eventual centre-stapling and folding into a

booklet. Two original pages are copied onto each side of copy paper. Four pages are, therefore, copied onto one sheet.

This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.

[Example] Copying eight originals in the pamphlet copy mode

●Scan the originals from the first page to the last

page. The order of copying will be automatically

adjusted by the machine.

●Either left binding (right to left turning) or right

binding (left to right turning) can be selected.

●

Four originals will be copied onto one sheet.

Blank pages may be automatically produced at

the end depending on the number of the originals.

●If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, copies can

be stapled in two positions along the centre of

copies and folded at the centre.

1Touch the [PAMPHLET COPY] key on the

special modes screen.

The PAMPHLET COPY

setting screen will

appear. The pamphlet

copy icon ( , etc.) will

also appear in the upper

left corner of the screen

to indicate that the

function is turned on.

2Designate the type of originals to be

copied: 1-sided or 2-sided.

Select the [2-SIDED] key

if you wish to scan a two-

sided original using the

automatic document

feeding function.

3Select the binding position (left binding or

right binding).

If you wish to insert a different type of paper for use as

a cover, follow steps 4 through 12 below.

If you do not wish to insert paper for a cover, continue

from step 8 on the next page.

4Touch the [COVER SETTING] key.

NOTE

To make pamphlet copies of a book or other bound original, use the book copy function (page 5-26). The book copy

function scans the opened original in two-page units. (Two pages are scanned at each scan, reducing the number

of repetitions of the scanning operation by a half.)

Finished copies are

folded in two.

Originals

(one-sided)

12345678

Originals

(two-sided)

Left binding

Right binding

First page

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

SPECIAL MODES

MARGIN SHIFT

PAMPHLET COPY

ERASE

JOB

BUILD

2-SIDED

ORIGINAL

1-SIDED

RIGHT

BINDING

LEFT

BINDING

CANCEL OK

RIGHT

BINDING

COVER

SETTING

SPECIAL MODES

5-7

5Select whether or not you wish to copy on

the cover ("YES" or "NO").

6Select the paper tray for the cover.

The currently selected

paper tray for the

cover is displayed.

The size and type of

paper in the currently

selected tray is

displayed.

In the example screen above, A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

size plain paper is loaded.

To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the

tray selection key. (In the screen example, the

"BYPASS TRAY" display is the tray selection key.)

The tray selection screen appears when the tray

selection key is touched. Select the desired tray in

this screen.

7Touch the [OK] key.

8Touch the [OK] key.

Return to the main

screen of copy mode.

9Place the original in the document feeder

or on the document glass. (page 4-3)

Ensure that the desired paper size has

been automatically selected based on the

original size.

To select another size

paper, select the desired

size and touch the

[AUTO IMAGE] key. The

appropriate copy ratio

will be selected

automatically based on

the original size and the paper size. (See steps 2

and 3 on page 4-15.)

Select any desired copy settings such as

the exposure or number of copies, and

then press the [START] key.

[When using the automatic document

feeder:]

Copying will start after all originals have been

scanned. (The next step is not needed.)

[When using the document glass:]

Replace the original with the next original and

press the [START] key. Repeat this operation until

all originals have been scanned and then touch

the [READ-END] key.

NOTES

●When the cover paper is fed from the inserter, the

cover cannot be copied on.

●Two-sided copying is not possible on label sheets,

transparency film, and tabbed paper. When

copying on a cover, do not select a tray that has

one of these types of paper.

PRINT ON COVER

YES

CANCEL OK

BYPASS

TRAY

PAPER TRAY

PLAIN

CANCEL OK

RIGHT

BINDING

COVER

SETTING

CANCEL OK

RIGHT

BINDING

COVER

SETTING

LEFT

BINDING

NOTES

●When the pamphlet copy function is set, the two-

sided copying mode will be automatically selected.

●If this function is used in combination with the

pamphlet copy function (pamphlet stapling) and

the number of origial pages exceeds the number

of pages that can be stapled, a message asking

you to select "CANCEL", "CONTINUE", or

"DIVIDE" will appear.

To cancel the job, select "CANCEL". To make

pamphlet copies without stapling, select

"CONTINUE". To divide the pages into sets that

can be stapled, select "DIVIDE".

If you performed steps 4 to 6 to insert cover paper,

divided stapling is not possible. You can either

continue pamphlet copying without stapling, or

cancel the job.

To cancel the pamphlet copy function, touch the

[CANCEL] key on the pamphlet copy setting screen

(step 2).

PAPER SELECT

AUTO A3

100%

SPECIAL MODES

5-8

Job build

Use job build mode when you need to copy more original pages than can be loaded at once in the document feeder

(the maximum number of pages that can be loaded is 150). This function allows the original pages to be scanned in

sets.

[Example] Copying 300 pages of A4 originals

1Touch the [JOB BUILD] key on the special

modes screen.

The [JOB BUILD] key

will be highlighted to

indicate that the function

is turned on, and the job

build icon (

)

will

appear in the upper left

of the screen.

2Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

Return to the main

screen of copy mode.

3Place the first set of originals in the

document feeder tray. (page 4-3)

4Make sure that the desired paper size is

selected, select the number of copies or

other copy settings, and press the

[START] key.

Scanning of originals will

start. After scanning of

the first set of originals (A

in the example above) is

completed, remove the

scanned originals, place

the next set of originals

(set B in the example) and press the [START] key.

Repeat this operation until all sets of originals have

been scanned.

If you wish to adjust the copy settings each time

you place a set of originals, see "Changing the

copy settings for each set of originals" on the next

page.

5Touch the [READ-END] key.

Originals

*Divide the originals into sets of 150 pages each.

Scan the originals starting from the first page of set

A. Scan set B next, taking care to keep the correct

page order.

A:150 sheets B:150 sheets

300 original pages

151

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

N SHIFT

LET COPY

ERASE DUAL

COP

JOB

BUILD

TANDE

COPY

RASE

1/3

DUAL PAGE

COPY

JOB

BUILD

TANDEM

COPY

To cancel the job build function, touch the [JOB

BUILD] key on the special modes screen (step 1).

The highlighted display will be cancelled.

READ-END

PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].

TO CHANGE COPY SETTINGS,

PRESS [CHANGE].

INTERRUPT

CHANGE

4. A3

ORIGINAL

SPECIAL MODES

5-9

■Changing the copy settings for each set of originals

When using job build mode, you can change the copy settings each time you place a set of originals.

After performing step 4 on page 5-8, follow the steps below.

5Touch the [CHANGE] key.

6Select the desired copy settings in the

screen that appears and press the

[START] key.

The copy settings that

can be selected are

"EXPOSURE", "PAPER

SELECT", and "COPY

RATIO".

If you touch the [READ-

END] key now, copying

will begin without

scanning the new set of

originals.

7Touch the [READ-END] key.

READ-END

PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].

TO CHANGE COPY SETTINGS,

PRESS [CHANGE].

INTERRUPT

CHANGE

4. A3

ORIGINAL

READ-END

INTERRUPT

4. A3

COPY RATIO

[START].

3. B4

1. 2. 5. A4

EXPOSURE

PAPER SELECT

100%

AUTO

AUTO A4

ORIGINAL A4

READ-END

PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].

TO CHANGE COPY SETTINGS,

PRESS [CHANGE].

INTERRUPT

CHANGE

4. A3

ORIGINAL

NOTES

●If the original size was set manually at the beginning of the job build procedure, it will not be possible to change

the original size setting. If the automatic original detection function is operating, the original size will be detected

for each set of originals placed.

●When the bypass tray is selected, it is not possible to change the paper type.

●If "XY ZOOM" was initially set for the ratio, it will not be possible to change the ratio setting.

●When job build mode is used in combination with any of the following functions, the [CHANGE] key will not

appear in the screen of step 5.

Pamphlet copy, tandem copy, covers/inserts, transparency inserts, multi-shot, book copy, tab copy, staple sort,

saddle stitch

SPECIAL MODES

5-10

Tandem copy

Two machines connected to the same network can be used to run a large copy job in parallel.

By dividing the job in half, approximately half the time is required to complete the job.

To use this function, two machines must be connected to your network as network printers. Even if more machines

are connected to the network, this function can only be used to have one other machine share a job.

Server machine and client machine

●In the following explanations, the machine on which

the copy job is initially set up and tandem copy

selected is called the server machine. The other

machine that is asked to share the job is called the

client machine.

●To use the tandem copy function, the tandem

settings must be configured in the administrator

settings. (See page 14 of the "Administrator settings

guide")

●When configuring the tandem settings in the server

machine, the IP address of the client machine must

be entered. For the port number, it is best to use the

initial setting (50001). Unless you experience

difficulty with this setting, do not change it. The

tandem settings should be configured by your

network administrator. If the server and client

machines will alternate server and client roles, the IP

address of the server machine must also be entered

in the client machine.The same port number can be

set in both machines.

1Touch the [TANDEM COPY] key on the

special modes screen.

The [TANDEM COPY]

key will be highlighted to

indicate that the function

is turned on, and the

tandem copy icon ( )

will appear in the upper

left of the screen.

2Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

You will return to the

main screen of copy

mode.

3Set the number of copies with the numeric

keys.

Up to 999 copies can be

set. When the [START]

key is pressed, the

copies will automatically

be divided between the

server and client

machines. If an odd

number of copies is set, the server machine will

make the extra set.

4Place the original in the document feeder

or on the document glass. (page 4-3)

100 sets of

copies 50 sets of

copies

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

ERASE

1/3

DUAL PAGE

COPY

JOB

BUILD

TANDEM

COPY

RASE

1/3

DUAL PAGE

COPY

JOB

BUILD

TANDEM

COPY

If an incorrect number of copies is set...

Press the clear key and set the correct number of

copies.

LOGOUT

SPECIAL MODES

5-11

5Press the [START] key.

NOTES

●To perform tandem copying, the server machine

and client machine must meet certain conditions.

After the [START] key is pressed on the server

machine, the server machine verifies that the

conditions have been met. If the conditions have

not been met, tandem copying does not begin

and "TANDEM OUTPUT IS NOT ALLOWED.

OUTPUT ALL SETS USING MASTER

MACHINE?" appears in the display. To have the

server machine make all the copies, touch the

[OK] key. To cancel the job, touch the [CANCEL]

key.

• As an example, the following conditions must

be met when a staple finisher is installed on the

server machine and not on the client machine:

(1) If tandem copying is executed for a two-

sided copy job with the number of copies

set to 999 and "Non-staple" is selected,

tandem copying will take place.

(2) If tandem copying is executed for a two-

sided copy job with the number of copies

set to 999 and "Staple" is selected,

tandem copying will not take place

because the client machine does not have

a finisher.

●After the [START] key is pressed, if the client

machine cannot print because it is out of paper or

other reason, the server machine will print its half

of the job. The other half of the job will be stored in

the client machine and the job will be printed when

the client machine is able to print.

●If auditing mode is enabled on both the server and

client machines, the same account number must

be entered on both machines.

●If auditing mode is enabled on the client machine

but not on the server machine, tandem copying

cannot be performed.

To cancel the tandem copy function, touch the

[TANDEM COPY] key on the special modes screen

(step 1). The highlighted display will be cancelled.

SPECIAL MODES

5-12

Covers/inserts

A different type of paper can be inserted in positions corresponding to front and back covers of a copy job when the

automatic document feeding function is used. A different type of paper can also be automatically added as an insert

at specified pages.

As an example, tabbed paper can be added as inserts at the beginning of chapters or at other pages to create an

indexed document.

●Covers/inserts can be disabled in the administrator settings (page 11 of the administrator settings guide).

Example of adding covers

Example of adding covers and inserts

Example of adding inserts

About the explanations of covers and

inserts

There are various ways of using covers and inserts.

To keep the explanations simple, covers and inserts

are explained separately. The procedure for

inserting covers is explained on page 5-13. The

procedure for adding inserts is explained on page 5-

14. After reading these explanations, see the

examples of using covers and inserts on pages 5-

17 to 5-22.

■Preparations for using covers and inserts

●Load the cover/insert paper in the tray before using the cover/insert function.

●Use the same size of paper for the covers/inserts as for the copies. (For the procedures for loading paper, see

pages 2-2 to 2-17.)

●Before selecting the cover/insert function, place the originals in the document feeder, select one-sided or two-

sided copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings as explained on pages 4-

7 to 4-10. When these settings have been completed, perform the procedure to select covers/inserts on the

following page.

●The original must be scanned from the document feeder. The document glass cannot be used.

●Tabbed paper can be used for cover/ inserts, however, two-sided copying cannot be performed on the tabbed

paper. Tabbed paper can be fed from the bypass tray, tray 3, and the inserter. The other trays cannot be used.

●Up to 100 covers/inserts can be inserted. Two covers/inserts cannot be inserted between the same pages.

●Pamphlet copying cannot be used in combination with covers/inserts.

●When performing two-sided copying of two-sided originals, an insert cannot be added between the front and

back sides of an original page.

Front cover

Back cover

Originals

Inserts

Front

cover

Back

cover

Originals

Inserts

SPECIAL MODES

5-13

■Procedure for inserting front and back cover paper

The paper for the front cover is called the front cover paper ("FRONT COVER" in the touch panel). The paper

for the back cover is called the back cover paper ("BACK COVER" in the touch panel).

●Examples of insertion methods for the front and back cover paper are given on pages 5-18 to 5-21.

1Touch the [COVERS/INSERTS] key in the

special modes screen (2nd screen).

2Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.

3Select the tray used for the front cover

paper.

The tray name (tray position) selected for the

front cover paper and the paper size and type

are shown in (X). If the tray in which you

loaded paper for the front cover is shown, touch

the [OK] key. You will return to the screen of step

If the correct tray for the cover sheet paper does

not appear in (X), touch the (Y) key. The tray

selection screen will appear. Select the tray in

which you loaded paper for the front cover. You

will return to the screen of above.

4Touch the [FRONT COVER] key in the

screen of step 2.

5Set the insertion conditions for the front

cover paper.

Select whether or not the front cover paper is to be

copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or [NO]).

Select whether one-sided copying or two-sided

copying is to be performed on the front cover

paper with the (Y) keys. This selection is only

possible when the [YES] key of (X) has been

selected. (The one-sided/two-sided selection

made here only applies to the front cover paper.

When the back cover paper is selected, the

selection only applies to the back cover paper.)

The (Z) key shows the tray selected for the front

cover paper in step 3 and the paper size and

type.

6Touch the [OK] key in the screen of step 5.

You will return to the screen of step 2.

When you return to the screen of step 2, the

[FRONT COVER] key will be highlighted.

7To insert back cover paper, repeat steps 2

through 6, using the [BACK COVER] key

instead of the [FRONT COVER] key.

8Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key in the

screen of step 7 to display a list of the

selected settings (page 5-16).

To edit or delete a cover/insert, follow

steps 1 and 2 on page 5-16. To exit the

cover/insert settings, touch the upper

[OK] key in the screen of step 7.

9Press the [START] key.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

SPECIAL MODES

COVERS/INSERTS TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

TAB COPYBOOK COPY

FRONT COVER

BACK COVER

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTING

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

PAGE LAYOUT

CANCEL OK

INSERTION

SETTINGS

COVERS/INSERTS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTING

PLAIN

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

FRONT COVER

BYPASS

TRAY BYPASS

TRAY

BACK COVER INSERTION

TYPE A

INSERTION

TYPE B

PLAIN

(X) (Y)

To cancel covers/inserts settings...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 2.

PLEASE SET UP A FRONT COVER.

FRONT COVER SETTING

PRINT ON FRONT COVER

YES NO

1-SIDED 2-SIDED

CANCEL

PAPER TRAY

BYPASS

TRAY

PLAIN

(X) (Y) (Z)

PLEASE SET UP COVERS/INSERTS.

SPECIAL MODES

COVERS/INSERTS

FRONT COVER

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTINGS

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

PAGE LAYOUT

INSERTION

SETTINGS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTINGS

BACK COVER

CANCEL

SPECIAL MODES

5-14

■Procedure for adding inserts

You can have different paper automatically inserted as an insert at a specified pages. Two types of insert paper

can be used. These are specified with the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key and [INSERTION TYPE B

SETTING] in the touch panel. Tabbed paper can be used as an insert.

●Examples of insertion methods for insert paper are given on page 5-22.

1Touch the [COVERS/INSERTS] key in the

special modes screen (2nd screen).

2Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.

3Select the tray used for insertion type A.

The tray name (tray position) selected for

insertion type A and the paper size and type are

shown in (X). If the tray in which you loaded

paper for insertion type A is shown, touch the

[OK] key. You will return to the screen of step 2.

If the correct tray for insertion type A does not

appear in (X), touch the (Y) key. The tray

selection screen will appear. Select the tray in

which you loaded paper for insertion type A. You

will return to the screen of step 2.

4Touch the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING]

key in the screen of step 2

5Set the insertion conditions for insertion

type A .

Select whether or not insertion type A paper is

to be copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or

[NO]).

Select whether one-sided copying or two-sided

copying is to be performed on insertion type A

with the (Y) keys. This selection is only possible

when the [YES] key of (X) has been selected.

(The one-sided/two-sided selection made here

only applies to insertion type A paper. When

insertion type B is selected, the selection only

applies to insertion type B paper.)

The (Z) key shows the tray selected for insertion

type A in step 3 and the paper size and type.

If a paper tray with tabbed paper is selected in the

screen of step 3, you can touch the [TAB COPY]

key. This allows you to select the tab width. Two-

sided copying is not possible on tabbed paper.

6Touch the [OK] key in the screen of step 5.

You will return to the screen of step 2.

When you return to the screen of step 2, the

[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key will be

highlighted.

If you wish to insert a different paper with

the [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key,

repeat steps 2 through 6. Use the

[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key instead

of the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key,

and the [INSERTION TYPE B] key instead

of the [INSERTION TYPE A] key.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

SPECIAL MODES

COVERS/INSERTS TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

TAB COPYBOOK COPY

FRONT COVER

BACK COVER

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTING

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

PAGE LAYOUT

CANCEL OK

INSERTION

SETTINGS

COVERS/INSERTS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTING

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

FRONT COVER

BYPASS

TRAY BYPASS

TRAY

BACK COVER INSERTION

TYPE A

INSERTION

TYPE B

PLAIN

(X) (Y)

INSERTION TYPE A SETTING

PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS

YES NO

1-SIDED 2-SIDED

CANCEL

PAPER TRAY

TAB COPY A4

PLAIN

BYPASS

TRAY

(X) (Y) (Z)

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTING

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

PAGE LAYOUT

INSERTION

SETTINGS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTING

CANCEL

SPECIAL MODES

5-15

8Touch the [INSERTION SETTINGS] key to

specify the pages where you wish to insert

the insert papers of [INSERTION TYPE A

SETTING] and [INSERTION TYPE B

SETTING].

9Touch the [INSERTION TYPE A] key or the

[INSERTION TYPE B] key, enter the page

number where you wish to insert the insert

paper with the numeric keys, and then

touch the [ENTER] key.

(X) shows the total number of inserts. Up to 100

inserts can be added. When inserting multiple

inserts, touch the [ENTER] key after each entry

of an insertion page number (insertion position)

with the numeric keys.

(Y) shows the tray selected in step 3 for

[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] and the paper

size and type.

(Z) shows the tray selected in step 3 for

[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] and the paper

size and type.

When the [INSERTION TYPE A] key is

highlighted, the insert settings apply to

[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING]. When the

[INSERTION TYPE B] key is highlighted, the

insert settings apply to [INSERTION TYPE B

SETTING].

Touch the [OK] key in the screen of step 9.

You will return to the screen of step 2.

When you return to the screen of step 2, the

[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key will be

highlighted.

If you wish to insert a different paper with

the [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key,

repeat steps 2 through 6. Use the

[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key instead

of the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key,

and the [INSERTION TYPE B] key instead

of the [INSERTION TYPE A] key.

Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key in the

screen of step 11 to display a list of the

selected settings (page 5-16).

To edit or delete a cover/insert, follow

steps 1 and 2 on page 5-16. To exit the

cover/insert settings, touch the upper

[OK] key in the screen of step 11.

Press the [START] key.

INSERTION

SETTINGS

RTION

SETTING

TION

SETTING

CANCE

INSERTION SETTINGS

INPUT THE PAGE NUMBER AND

PRESS [ENTER]. USE [C] KEY TO AMEND.

INSERTION

TOTAL:0

ENTER A4

PLAIN

INSERTION PAGE

BYPASS

TRAY BYPASS

TRAY

PLAIN

INSERTION

TYPE A

INSERTION

TYPE B

(X) (Y) (Z)

To cancel covers/inserts settings...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 2.

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTING

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

PAGE LAYOUT

INSERTION

SETTINGS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTING

CANCEL

SPECIAL MODES

5-16

■Checking, editing, and deleting cover/insert pages

The [PAGE LAYOUT] key appears after covers/inserts settings are configured (the settings of step 1 through

step 7 on pages 5-13 and 5-14).

The [PAGE LAYOUT] key is used for the following:

●To display the status of covers/inserts pages

●To edit, delete, or add inserted pages

1Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key.

2The set covers/inserts pages are shown.

If there are multiple screens, touch the or

key to change screens.

Displayed icons:

: Front side copy only

: Back side copy only

: Two-sided copy

: No copying

For inserts, the insertion page also appears.

" " represents a page number.

/- : Front side copy only at page

/ : Two-sided copy at page /

-/ : Back side copy only at page

< : Insert non-copied insert at page

To edit or delete an inserted page, touch the key

of the page you wish to edit or delete in the page

layout screen. When the key is touched, the

[CANCEL], [DELETE], and [AMEND] keys

appear.

●To cancel, touch the [CANCEL] key.

●To delete an inserted page, touch the

[DELETE] key.

●To edit an inserted page, touch the [AMEND]

key. The screen of step 5 on page 5-13 or the

screen of step 5 on page 5-14 appears. Edit

the page as explained in step 5 on page 5-13

or step 5 on page 5-14.

3When you have finished checking the

pages, touch the [OK] key.

To display the [PAGE LAYOUT] key...

Configure the settings in step 1 through step 7

on pages 5-13 and 5-14.

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTING

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

PAGE LAYOUT

INSERTION

SETTINGS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTING

CANCEL

PAGE LAYOUT

FRONT COVER

INSERTION

TYPE A

INSERTION

TYPE B

7/8

INSERTION

TYPE A

12/-

1/2

AMEND THE INSERTION?

CANCEL DELETE AMEND

INSERTION

TYPE B

BYPASS

SPECIAL MODES

5-17

■Examples of covers and inserts

The relations between the originals and finished copies when covers or inserts are inserted are shown on the

following pages.

Covers

●One-sided copying of one-sided originals

(page 5-18)

●One-sided copying of two-sided originals

(page 5-20)

●Two-sided copying of one-sided originals

(page 5-19)

●Two-sided copying of two-sided originals

(page 5-21)

Inserts

●One-sided copying of one-sided originals

(page 5-22)

●One-sided copying of two-sided originals

(page 5-22)

●Two-sided copying of one-sided originals

(page 5-22)

●Two-sided copying of two-sided originals

(page 5-22)

■Symbols used for covers and inserts

The following symbols are used to make the explanations easier to understand.

The numbers that appear indicate relations between the originals and copies, and will vary depending on the

settings.

Type

Symbol Meaning

Icon

appearing

in display

Type

Symbol Meaning

Icon

appearing

in display

Front cover

Front cover when not

copied on.

Inserts

Insert when not copied on.

Front cover after one-sided

copying.

Insert after one-sided

copying.

Front cover after two-sided

copying. (One page is not

copied on.)

Insert after one-sided

copying. (One page is not

copied on.)

Front cover after two-sided

copying.

Insert after two-sided

copying.

Back cover

Back cover when not

copied on.

Other

One-sided original or

output page of regular one-

sided copying

Back cover after one-sided

copying of one-sided

original.

Two-sided original or

output page of regular two-

sided copying.

Back cover after two-sided

copying. (One page is not

copied on.)

One-sided original or

output page of regular one-

sided copying.

Back cover after two-sided

copying.

One-sided original or

output page of regular one-

sided copying.

5 5

SPECIAL MODES

5-18

■Covers (One-sided copying of one-sided originals)

One-sided copies are made of the following one-sided originals.

1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page 6th page

12 3 4 5 6

Copying on cover Resulting copies

Front cover Back cover

No copying No copying

One-sided

copying No copying

Two-sided

copying No copying

No copying One-sided

copying

No copying Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

12 3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

12 3 4 5

12 3 4

12 3 4 5

1234

345

3 4

SPECIAL MODES

5-19

■Covers (Two-sided copying of one-sided originals)

Two-sided copies are made of the following one-sided originals.

1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page 6th page

12 3 4 5 6

Copying on cover Resulting copies

Front cover Back cover

No copying No copying

One-sided

copying No copying

Two-sided

copying No copying

No copying One-sided

copying

No copying Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

1 2

SPECIAL MODES

5-20

■Covers (One-sided copying of Two-sided originals)

One-sided copies are made of the following two-sided originals.

1st page 2nd page 3rd page

Copying on cover Resulting copies

Front cover Back cover

No copying No copying

One-sided

copying No copying

Two-sided

copying No copying

No copying One-sided

copying

No copying Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

12 3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

12 3 4 5

12 3 4

12 3 4 5

1234

345

3 4

SPECIAL MODES

5-21

■Covers (Two-sided copying of two-sided originals)

Two-sided copies are made of the following two-sided originals.

1st page 2nd page 3rd page

Copying on cover Resulting copies

Front cover Back cover

No copying No copying

One-sided

copying No copying

Two-sided

copying No copying

No copying One-sided

copying

No copying Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

SPECIAL MODES

5-22

■Inserts (One-sided copying of one-sided originals)

One-sided and two-sided copying is performed using the following one-sided originals. The insert is added as

the third page.

■Inserts (One-sided copying of two-sided originals)

One-sided and two-sided copying is performed using the following two-sided originals.

1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page 6th page

12 3 4 5 6

Copying on

insert Resulting copies (one-sided copying) Resulting copies

(two-sided copying)

No copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

12 3 4 5 6 1

1234 5 6 1

3 4

123

5 6 1

1st page 2nd page 3rd page

Copying on

insert Resulting copies (one-sided copying) Resulting copies

(two-sided copying)

No copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

12 3 4 5 6 1

1234 5 6 1

3 5

123

5 6 1

SPECIAL MODES

5-23

Transparency film with insert sheets

When copying onto transparency film, blank insert sheets can be placed between transparent sheets.

●

This function only operates in "one-sided to one-

sided" and "two-sided to one-sided" modes.

●Multiple copies cannot be selected in this mode.

●

The inserts are inserted under each transparency

as shown at left.

●

Select insert paper that is the same size as the

transparencies.

●When feeding insert paper from an inserter,

copying on the insert paper is not possible.

●Transparencies can be fed from the bypass tray

or tray 3.

●

If the transparencies are loaded in tray 3, be sure

to set the paper size and paper type as explained

on pages 2-14 and 2-15.

1Load transparency film into the bypass

tray.

Remove any paper

already in the bypass

tray before loading the

transparency film. (To

load paper in the bypass

tray, see pages 2-10 and

2-11.)

2Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key in the

main screen and select the bypass tray

paper type in the paper setting screen

(touch (X) below).

3Touch the [TRANSPARENCY] key.

4Touch the [OK] key.

If the paper size was changed from an inch size to

an AB size, or from an AB size to an inch size, be

sure to set the paper type and size as explained on

steps 5 to 7 on page 2-14 and steps 8 to 10 on

page 2-15.

5Select the bypass tray.

6Touch the [TRANSPARENCY INSERTS]

key in the special modes screen (2nd

screen).

The Transparency inserts

setting screen will appear.

The transparency inserts

icon ( , etc.) will also

appear in the upper left

corner of the screen to

indicate that the function

is turned on.

Insert sheets

Example: Inserting insert sheets between transparencies

Originals (1-sided)

Originals (2-sided)

Two-sided originals are

only supported when

automatic document

feeding is used.

Inserts can also be

copied on.

If the transparencies are loaded in tray 3, steps

1 to 5 below are not necessary.

FOR COPY.

AUTO

100%

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

EXPOSURE

PLAIN PLAIN

HEAVY PAPER

PLAIN PLAIN

2. B5

5. A4

(X)

HEAVY PAPER

TYPE.

LETTER HEAD

LABELSPRE-PUNCHED

COLOUR TRANSPARENCY

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

TYPE

NON STANDARD SIZE

SIZE

AUTO-INCH

AUTO-AB

SIZE INPUT

8 X11

A4,B5

TYPE/SIZE SETTING

2/2

AUTO

100%

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

EXPOSURE

N PLAIN

NPLAIN

5. A4

SPECIAL MODES

COVERS/INSERTS TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

TAB COPYBOOK COPY

SPECIAL MODES

5-24

7Set the insertion conditions for the insert

paper.

Select whether or not the insert paper will be

copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or [NO]). If

[YES] is selected, insert paper cannot be fed

from an inserter.

The (Y) key shows the tray selected for the insert

paper and the paper size and type. To select a

different tray, touch this key to display the tray

selection screen and select the tray that has the

insert paper.

8Touch the outer [OK] key in the screen of

step 7.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

Multi shot

Multiple original pages can be copied onto one sheet of copy paper in a uniform layout. Select 2in1 to copy two

original pages onto one sheet, or 4in1 to copy four original pages onto one sheet. This function is convenient when

you wish to present multiple pages in a compact format, or show a view of all pages in a document.

[Example] Copying 4 original pages onto one sheet of paper

(Page number : 4in1, layout : left top : right top (see the next page))

●When using the multi shot function, place the

originals, select the desired paper size, and

select the copying mode before selecting the

multi shot function on the special modes screen.

●When using the multi shot function, the

appropriate copy ratio will be automatically set

based on the original size, paper size, and the

number of originals to be copied onto one sheet.

The minimum reduction ratio is 25%. The

original size, copy paper size, and selected

number of original pages may require that the

ratio be less than 25%. As copying will take

place at 25% in this case, part of the original

images may be cut off.

PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS

YES NO

CANCEL

INSERTION SHEET

TRAY5

PLAIN

(X) (Y)

NOTE

If insert paper is fed from an inserter, the output will

be delivered to the finisher (or saddle stitch finisher).

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

To cancel the Transparency film with insert sheets

function, touch the [CANCEL] key on the

Transparency film with insert sheets setting screen.

One-sided copies from

one-sided originals

One-sided copies from

two-sided originals

Copies

SPECIAL MODES

5-25

1Touch the [MULTI SHOT] key in the special

modes screen (2nd screen).

The MULTI SHOT setting

screen will appear.

A multi shot icon ( ,

etc.) will also appear in

the upper left of the

screen to indicate that

the function is turned on.

2Select the number of images to be copied

onto one sheet of copy paper.

If needed, the

orientation of the copy

paper and the

orientation of the images

will be rotated.

3Select the layout.

Select the order in which

the originals will be

arranged on the copy.

The arrows in the above diagram indicate the

directions in which the images are arranged.

4Touch the [OK] key (inside [OK] key) on

the multi shot setting screen.

You will return to the special modes screen.

5Touch the [OK] key in the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS MULTI SHOT

CARD SHOTTAB COPY

SPECIAL MODES

MULTI SHOT

2in1 4in1

LAYOUT

CANCEL OK

2in1

4in1

Shot number

Layout

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used, see

pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document glass is

being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-13.

To cancel the multi shot function, touch the [CANCEL]

key in the multi shot setting screen (the screen of step

2).

SPECIAL MODES

5-26

Book copy

This function is convenient when you wish to compile copies of books or other bound originals into an attractive

pamphlet format. The two pages of the open book are scanned as a set, and two pages each are copied onto the

front and back sides of the copy paper (four pages are copied onto one sheet of copy paper). This allows the copies

to be folded down the centre and made into a pamphlet.

[Example] Book copying an 8-page pamphlet

●Scan the originals from the first page to the last

page. The order of copying will be automatically

adjusted by the machine.

●Either left binding (right to left turning) or right

binding (left to right turning) can be selected.

●

Four originals will be copied onto one sheet.

Blank pages may be automatically produced at

the end depending on the number of the originals.

●If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, book copy

can be used in combination with the pamphlet

function to staple and fold the copies at the

centreline.

1Touch the [BOOK COPY] key in the special

modes screen (2nd screen).

The BOOK COPY

setting screen will

appear. The book copy

icon ( , etc.) will also

appear in the upper left

corner of the screen to

indicate that the function

is turned on.

Select whether the book opens to the left or

to the right, and touch the [OK] key in the

book copy setting screen.

You will return to the

special modes screen.

3Select any desired cover settings.

If you wish to use a

different type of paper for

the cover, perform steps

4 to 12 on pages 5-6 to 5-

If you do not wish to use

a different type of paper,

continue from step 4.

4Touch the [OK] key in the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

5Place the originals on the document glass.

(page 4-3)

Scan the original pages in

the following order:

Opened front and back

cover

Opened inside of front

cover and 1st page

Opened 2nd and 3rd

page

Opened last page and

inside of back cover

6Make sure that the desired paper size has

been selected.

If the desired paper size

is not selected, select

the desired size.

7Select the number of copies and any other

desired copy settings, and then press the

[START] key.

Place the next two pages and press the

[START] key. Repeat until all pages have

been scanned, and then touch the [READ-

END] key.

Finished copies are

folded in two.

Originals

Left binding

Right binding

First page

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

SPECIAL MODES

COVERS/INSERTS TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

TAB COPYBOOK COPY

RIGHT

BINDING

SET

LEFT

BINDING

CANCEL OK

RIGHT

BINDING

COVER

SETTING

When book copy is selected, two-sided

copying is automatically selected.

To cancel the book copy function, touch the [CANCEL] key

in the book copy setting screen (the screen of step 2).

PAPER SELECT

AUTO A3

100%

SPECIAL MODES

5-27

Tab copy

Copying is possible on the tabs of tabbed paper. Prepare appropriate originals for the tab captions.

[Example]

Relations between originals and tabbed paper

Original Tabbed paper Copy

Tab width

A4 : Maximum of 20 mm

(8-1/2" x 11" : Maximum of 5/8")

INDEX

Area A

Area B

●The tab caption is shifted by the amount of the tab width setting, so keep areas A and B blank.

Left binding

(normal top-bottom)

Right binding

(Inverted top-bottom)

Right binding

(Inverted top-bottom)

Originals

Prepare these

originals

Originals placed

face up in the

document feeder

Originals placed

on the document

glass

Tabbed

paper

Load tabbed

paper in the

bypass tray or

tray 3

Result

(Normal orderA-E) (Normal orderA-E) (Reverse orderE-A)

Leading edge

of original

(Normal orderA-E)

Leading edge

of original

(Normal orderA-E)

Leading edge

of original

(Reverse orderE-A)

(Normal

order A-E)

(Normal

orderA-E)

(Reverse

orderE-A)

Feeding

direction Feeding

direction

(Top-bottom

normal) (Top-bottom

reversed)

(Top-bottom

reversed)

SPECIAL MODES

5-28

1Touch the [TAB COPY] key in the special

modes screen (2nd screen).

The TAB COPY setting

screen will appear. A

tab copy icon ( ) will

also appear in the

upper left corner of the

screen to indicate that

the function is turned

on.

2If necessary, set the image shift width (tab)

and touch the [OK] key.

Set the image shift

width (tab) with the

and keys.

The width can be set

from 0 to 20 mm (0 to

5/8") in increments of

1 mm (1/8").

3Touch the [OK] key in the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

4Load tabbed paper in the bypass tray.

Place the tabbed paper

so that the edges with

the tabs are the trailing

edge.

To use tab paper in tray

3, set the paper type

setting of tray 3 to "TAB

PAPER" in the tray

settings of the system

settings (page 2-14).

To load tabbed paper in

tray 3, see "Loading tabbed paper" on page 2-6.

5Select "TAB PAPER" for the paper type

setting.

The paper type setting is explained in “Setting the

paper type and paper size” (page 2-14).

If you are using tray 3, see “Setting the paper size

when a special size is loaded” (page 2-17).

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

NOTE

The width of the tabbed paper can be up to A4 width

(210 mm) + 20 mm (or 8-1/2" x 11" width (8-1/2") +

5/8").

SPECIAL MODES

COVERS/INSERTS TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

TAB COPYBOOK COPY

IMAGE SHIFT

CANCEL

(0 20)

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

When performing tab copying with a right

binding

If you are using left-binding tabbed paper for a right

binding, either stack the sheets in reverse order or

scan the originals in reverse order.(See the table on

the previous page.)

To cancel the tab copy function, touch the [CANCEL]

key in the tab copy setting screen (the screen of step

2).

SPECIAL MODES

5-29

Card shot

When copying a card, this function allows you to combine the front and back sides on a single sheet of paper.

●Copying is only possible on standard size paper.

●A copy ratio cannot be selected when using this

function.

●The image cannot be rotated when using this

function.

1Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and then

select the desired paper size.

The selected paper size

key is highlighted and

the paper selection

screen closes.

2Touch the [CARD SHOT] key in the special

modes screen (2nd screen).

The CARD SHOT

setting screen will

appear. A card shot

icon ( , etc.) will also

appear in the upper left

corner of the screen to

indicate that the

function is turned on.

3Enter the X dimension (width) and Y

dimension (length) of the original with the

keys.

●X (width) is initially selected. Enter X and then

touch the Y ( ) key to enter Y.

●To return the X and Y values to the initial

settings configured in the administrator

settings, touch the [SIZE RESET] key. (See

"CARD SHOT SETTINGS" on page 16 of the

administrator settings guide.)

●To have the images enlarged or reduced by a

suitable ratio based on the entered original

size so that the front and back sides fit into the

selected paper size, touch the [FIT TO PAGE]

key.

Original

Example:

Portrait

A4 (8-1/2") size

Example:

Landscape

A4 (8-1/2") size

Copy

Back of

card

Front of

card

CARD CARD

CARD

NOTE

If paper of the desired size is not loaded in any tray,

load paper of the required size in a paper tray or the

bypass tray. (See "Setting the paper type and paper

size" on page 2-14.)

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

1. A4

PLAIN PLAIN PLAIN

HEAVY PAPER

PLAIN PLAIN

3. A4

4. A3

2. B5

5. A4

TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS MULTI SHOT

CARD SHOTTAB COPY

SIZE RESET

CANCEL OK

FIT TO

PAGE

SPECIAL MODES

5-30

4Touch the outer [OK] key.

You will return to the

main screen of copy

mode.

5Place the original on the document glass.

Place the front side of

the original face down

and close the

document cover.

6Follow steps 4 through 5 of "Copying from

the document glass" (page 4-12).

7Press the [START] key.

The front side of the

card is scanned.

8Place the back side of the original face

down on the document glass (see step 5).

9Press the [START] key.

The back side of the

card is scanned.

10Touch the [READ-END] key.

SIZE RESET

CANCEL OK

FIT TO

PAGE

NOTE

The original must be placed on the document glass.

The document feeder (automatic document feeding

function) cannot be used.

To cancel the card shot function, touch the

[CANCEL] key in the card shot setting screen (the

screen of step 4).

SPECIAL MODES

5-31

Mirror image

This function is used to print a mirror image of the original. The images will be inverted in the right to left direction

on the copies.

1Touch the [MIRROR IMAGE] key in the

special modes screen (3rd screen).

The [MIRROR IMAGE]

key will be highlighted to

indicate that the function

is turned on, and the

mirror image icon ( )

will appear in the upper

left of the screen.

2Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

B/W reverse

Black and white are reversed in the copy to create a negative image.

1Touch the [B/W REVERSE] key in the

special modes screen (3rd screen).

The [B/W REVERSE]

key will be highlighted to

indicate that the function

is turned on, and the

mirror image icon ( )

will appear in the upper

left of the screen.

2Touch the [OK] key in the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

Original Copy

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

ECIAL MODES

MIRROR

IMAGE

B/W

REVERSE

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

To cancel the mirror image function, touch the

[MIRROR IMAGE] key in the special modes screen

(the screen of step 1).

NOTES

●When this function is selected, the exposure mode setting (page 4-14) automatically changes to "Text".

●Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be printed with black/white reverse

to reduce toner consumption.

Original B/W reverse copy

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

ECIAL MODES

MIRROR

IMAGE

B/W

REVERSE

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

To cancel the B/W reverse function, touch the [B/W

REVERSE] key in the special modes screen (the

screen of step 1).

SPECIAL MODES

5-32

Print menu

The date, a stamp, page numbers, and entered text can be printed on copies. Four selections are available for the

PRINT MENU:

• Date print (page 5-35)

This prints the date on the paper.

[Example] Printing 2010/APR/4 in the upper right-

hand corner of the paper

The format of the date and the character that

separates the year, month, and day can be changed.

• Page numbering (page 5-37)

Page numbers can be printed on copies.

[Example] Printing page numbers in the bottom right-

hand corner of the paper

The format of the page number can be changed.

• Stamp (page 5-36)

Print a message such as "CONFIDENTIAL" in

reverse text on the paper.

[Example] Printing "CONFIDENTIAL" in the upper

right-hand corner of the paper

One of 12 stamps can be selected.

• Text (page 5-41)

Entered text can be printed.

[Example] Printing "Meeting" in the upper left-hand

corner of the paper

Up to 50 characters can be printed. You can store up

to 30 sequences of frequently used text.

Six printing positions are available: left, centre, or right of the top or bottom of the page.

Each printing position is divided into an area for the date, page number, and text (A below), and an area for the stamp

(B below).

2010/APR/4

CONFIDENTIAL

Meeting

Top left Top right

Top centre

Bottom left Bottom right

Bottom centre

Print menu Printing

area

Maximum number of

settings

DATE A One position only

STAMP B 6 positions

PAG E

NUMBERING A One position only

TEXT A 6 positions

NOTES

●A part that overlaps the printed text will not be copied.

●If the set text content overlaps the print content of another position, the central print content will be moved to the

bottom, the content on the left will be next, and the content on the right will be placed on top in that order such

that only the content visible at the top is printed. Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed.

●The printed text will be printed at the set size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size.

●The printed text will also be printed at the set density regardless of the copy exposure.

●Some copy paper sizes may cause the printed contents to be cut off or the print position to shift.

●If a copy job with a print menu setting is saved using the document filing function, the print menu setting will not

be saved. If you wish to print a file saved in copy mode and use a print menu setting, use the special modes in

the Job settings / print screen (or the document filing print screen in the Web page if the machine is connected

to a network) to select the print menu setting. (A print menu setting cannot be selected when printing a file saved

in a mode other than copy mode.)

SPECIAL MODES

5-33

■Common operation procedure for using the print menu

1Touch the [PRINT MENU] key in the special

modes screen (3rd screen).

The print menu setting

screen will appear. The

print menu icon ( ) will

also appear in the upper

left corner of the screen

to indicate that the

function is turned on.

2Select the print position.

Six positions are

available: left, centre,

or right of the top or

bottom of the page.

The touched key is

highlighted.

The keys indicating the print position appear as

follows depending on the state of the setting:

The image displayed within each key varies

depending on the key position.

3Select the print menu.

The settings screen of

the print menu

appears.

For information on

each of the print

menus, see the

settings of each.

●DATE (page 5-35) ● STAMP (page 5-36)

●PAGE NUMBERING (page 5-37) ● TEXT (page 5-

41)

4To select print menu settings at another

print position, repeat steps 2 and 3.

5Touch the key.

6To specify the orientation of the original,

touch the [ORIGINAL ORIENTATION] key.

If you placed a two-sided original, touch the

[ ] key to specify the binding style (book or

tablet). The icon of the selected binding style is

highlighted.

7If you are adding covers or inserts, select

whether or not you wish to print on the

covers or inserts.

If you do not wish to print on covers or inserts,

touch the checkbox to remove the checkmark.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special functions" on

page 5-2.

Not selected, print menu setting has not

been selected.

Selected during selection of the print

menu setting.

Not selected, print menu setting has

already been selected.

PRINT MENU

B/W

REVERSE

SPECIAL MODES

PRINT MENU LAYOU

OKCANCELLAYOUT

DATE STAMP

TEXT

PAGE

NUMBERING

1/2

NOTES

●If the [DATE], [PAGE NUMBERING], or [TEXT] key

is touched when other than a "STAMP" print menu

setting has been selected for the print position

selected in step 2, a message will appear. To

overwrite the previously set print content of the

print menu that you touched, touch the [YES] key.

To keep the previous settings, touch the [NO] key.

●

The "DATE" and "PAGE NUMBERING" cannot be set

in multiple positions. If either of these keys is touched

when a date or page numbering setting has already

been configured, a message will appear asking you if

you wish to move the print settings to the position that

you selected in step 2. To move the print settings,

touch the [YES] key. Otherwise touch the [NO] key.

NOTES

●

If you are not copying on covers or inserts, printing will

not take place on these even if a checkmark appears.

●A page number is never printed on covers or

inserts, regardless of the above setting.

●If covers/inserts have been disabled in the

administrator settings, the checkbox will be greyed

out to prevent selection.

1/2

LAYOUT CANCEL OK

STAMP

TEXT

DATE

PAGE

NUMBERING

CANCEL

LAYOUT

SPECIAL MODES

PRINT MENU

ORIGINAL ORIENTATION 2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE

PRINT ON COVERS/INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS

2/2

CANCEL

LAYOUT

SPECIAL MODES

PRINT MENU

ORIGINAL ORIENTATION 2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE

PRINT ON COVERS/INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS

2/2

SPECIAL MODES

5-34

8Check the print layout if needed (page 5-

43).

To display the layout

and print content of the

configured print menu,

touch the [LAYOUT]

key. The position can

be changed and

settings cancelled if

needed.

9Touch the [OK] key on the print menu

setting screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

Printing in combination with other special functions

When a print menu is combined with one of the following special modes, printing will reflect the selected special

mode.

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used, see

pages 4-7 through 4-10.

If the document glass is being used, see pages 4-11

through 4-13.

LAYOUT CANCEL

S WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS

2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE

NOTE

To cancel print menu...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 3.

Special modes Printing operation

Margin shift Like the copy image, the printed contents are shifted in accordance with the set margin.

Dual page copy The print content is printed on each copy sheet.

Pamphlet copy

Book copy The print content is printed on each page of the "book".

Multi shot

Card shot The print content is printed on each copy sheet.

Covers/inserts In the print menu settings, specify whether or not the print content is printed on covers and inserts.

NOTE

When combined with "Erase", "Job build", "Mirror image", "B/W reverse", or "Tab copy", printing takes place

normally at the set position on the paper.

SPECIAL MODES

5-35

■Printing the date on copies

The date can be printed on copies. Four selections each are available for the date format and the character that

separates the year, month, and day.

1Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-33).

2Touch the [DATE] key.

3Select the date format.

The selected date format

is highlighted.

If you selected [YYYY/

MM/DD], [MM/DD/YYYY],

or [DD/MM/YYYY], you

can select the character

that separates the year,

month, and date. Select [/] (slash), [.] (period), [-]

(hyphen), or [ ] (space).

4Check the date and format.

The date to be printed

is displayed in

"CURRENT SETTING"

in the selected format.

The date that appears

is the date set in the

machine. If you need to

change the date, touch the [DATE CHANGE] key.

The following screen appears.

Touch the key of the number (year, month, or day)

that needs to be changed, and then adjust the

number with the or key. When finished,

touch the [OK] key.

5Select the pages to be printed on.

Select whether to print

on only the first page,

or all pages. The

touched key is

highlighted.

6Touch the [OK] key.

7Continue from step 4 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-33).

NOTE

The date must be previously set in the system settings. (See page 2-18.)

NOTE

If you select a non-existent date (for example, Feb. 30),

the [OK] key will grey out to prevent entry of the date.

PAGE

NUMBERING

CANCEL

LAYOUT

STAMP

DATE

TEXT

1/2

DATE

YYYY/MM/DD

MM/DD/YYYY

DD/MM/YYYY

MM DD, YYYY

CANCEL

FIRST PAGE

ALL PAGES

CURRENT SETTING

2010/APR/04

DATE CHANGE

04 042010

YEAR MONTH DAY

NOTE

To cancel a date print setting...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the date selection screen.

(The screen of step 6.)

CANCEL

FIRST PAGE

ALL PAGES

CURRENT SETTING

2010/APR/04

DATE CHANGE

CANCEL

FIRST PAGE

ALL PAGES

CURRENT SETTING

2010/APR/04

DATE CHANGE

SPECIAL MODES

5-36

■Printing a stamp (reverse text) on copies

A message such as "CONFIDENTIAL" can be printed in reverse text on copies.

The following 12 messages are available.

You can select from three density levels for the background of the stamp.

Two selections are available for the size of the stamp.

1Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-33).

2Touch the [STAMP] key.

3Select the stamp that you wish to print.

The selected stamp is

highlighted. If the

desired stamp does not

appear, change

screens with the

or key.

4Adjust the exposure as needed.

The density of the

background of the

stamp can be adjusted.

Touch the [EXPOSURE]

key to display the

following screen.

Touch the key for a

darker background.

Touch the key for a

lighter background (3

levels).

When finished, touch

the [OK] key.

5Select the desired stamp size.

"LARGER" is initially

selected. To make the

stamp smaller, touch

the [LARGER/

SMALLER] key.

"Smaller" is selected

when [SMALLER] is

highlighted.

6Select the pages to be printed on.

Select whether to print

on only the first page,

or all pages. The

touched key is

highlighted.

7Touch the [OK] key.

8Continue from step 4 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-33).

CONFIDENTIAL PRIORITY PRELIMINARY FINAL

FOR YOUR INFO. DO NOT COPY IMPORTANT COPY

URGENT DRAFT TOP SECRET PLEASE REPLY

NOTE

The text of the stamp cannot be edited.

PAGE

NUMBERING

CANCEL

LAYOUT

STAMP

DATE

TEXT

1/2

PRIORITY

STAMP

CONFIDENTIAL

FOR YOUR INFO. DO NOT COPY

URGENT DRAFT

CANCEL OK

1/2

EXPOSURE

SMALLER

FIRST PAGE

ALL PAGES

1 32

LARGER

SIZE

21 3

EXPOSURE

NOTE

To cancel a stamp setting...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the stamp selection

screen. (The screen of step 7.)

CANCEL OK

1/2

EXPOSURE

SMALLER

FIRST PAGE

ALL PAGES

1 32

LARGER

SIZE

CANCEL OK

1/2

EXPOSURE

SMALLER

FIRST PAGE

ALL PAGES

1 32

LARGER

SIZE

CANCEL OK

1/2

EXPOSURE

SMALLER

FIRST PAGE

ALL PAGES

1 32

LARGER

SIZE

SPECIAL MODES

5-37

■Printing the page number on copies

The page number can be printed on copies. One of 6 formats can be selected for the page number.

1Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-33).

2Touch the [PAGE NUMBERING] key.

3Select the page number format.

The selected format is

highlighted.

If you selected "1/5, 2/5, 3/5",

"PAGE NUMBER/TOTAL PAGES" will be printed.

"AUTO" is initially selected for "TOTAL PAGE",

which means that the number of scanned original

pages is automatically used. If you need to enter

the total pages manually (for example, when a

large number of originals are scanned in batches),

touch the [MANUAL] key to display the total page

entry screen.

Enter the total pages (1 to 999) with the numeric

keys and touch the [OK] key.

If you need to change the starting or ending

number of page numbering, the first page

printed on, or the print settings for covers/

inserts, touch the [PAGE NUMBER] key.

5Touch the [MANUAL] key.

6Enter settings for "FIRST NUMBER",

"LAST NUMBER", and "PRINTING

STARTS FROM SHEET".

Touch each key so that

it is highlighted, and

then enter the number

with the numeric keys

(1 to 999).

To return a number to

its initial value (FIRST

NUMBER: 1, LAST NUMBER: AUTO, PRINTING

STARTS FROM SHEET: 1), touch the [C] (clear)

key while the key of the number is highlighted. If

you enter the wrong number, press the [C] (clear)

key and enter the correct number.

NOTES

●When two-sided copying is performed, each side of

the paper is counted as a page. If the last page is

blank, it will not be included in the total pages.

However, if [COUNT BACK COVER] is selected,

the last page will be counted. (See step 7.)

●When used in combination with "Dual page copy",

"Multi shot", or "Card shot", the number of copied

images is the total pages.

●When used in combination with "Pamphlet copy" or

"Book copy", the number of pages in the "book" is

the total pages.

PAGE

NUMBERING

CANCEL

LAYOUT

STAMP

DATE

TEXT

1/2

PAGE NUMBERING

PAGE NUMBERING FORMAT

1,2,3.. (1),(2),(3)..

P.1,P.2,P.3..

-1-,-2-,-3-..

<1>,<2>,<3>.. 1/5,2/5,3/5..

PAGE NUMBERING

PAGE NUMBERING FORMAT

1,2,3..

-1-,-2-,-3-..

<1>,<2>,<3>..

(1),(2),(3)..

P.1,P.2,P.3..

1/5,2/5,3/5..

OKCANCEL

TOTAL PAGE

AUTO

MANUAL

30 PAGE

NOTES

●A last number smaller than the "FIRST NUMBER"

cannot be set.

●"LAST NUMBER" is initially set to "AUTO", which

means that the page number is printed on each

page through the final page in accordance with the

"FIRST NUMBER" and "PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET" settings.

●A number less than the total page number is set as

the last number, the page number will not be

printed on the pages that follow the set number.

●

Unlike the first and last page numbers, "PRINTING

STARTS FROM SHEET" specifies the sheet of paper

(not the page number) from which printing of the page

number begins.

For example, when "3" is selected for one-sided

copying, printing of the page number will start from the

3rd sheet of copy paper (the copy of the 3rd original

page). When "3" is selected for two-sided copying,

printing of the page number will start from the 3rd sheet

of copy paper, which is the copy of the 5th original page.

CANCEL OK

TOTAL PAGE

AUTO

MANUAL

PAGE NUMBER

AUTO

MANUAL

FIRST NUMBER

PRINTING STARTS FROM

FIRST NUMBER

PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET

LAST NUMBER

AUTO

SPECIAL MODES

5-38

7When covers/inserts are added and you

wish to include the covers/inserts in the

page number count, touch the [COVERS/

INSERTS COUNTING] key.

8Select the checkboxes of the items that

you wish to include in the page number

count and then touch the [OK] key.

Items that are selected are reflected in the print

image on the right side of the screen.

9Touch the [OK] key.

Touch the [OK] key.

Continue from step 4 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-33).

NOTES

●When an item is selected, one inserted sheet (front

cover, insert, or back cover) is counted as one page

during one-sided copying, and two pages during

two-sided copying. However, if one-sided copying

is used for the body pages and two-sided copying is

used for the inserted sheets, each body page will

be counted as one page and each inserted sheet

will be counted as two pages.

●

Printing never takes place on the front cover and back

cover, regardless of whether or not these are counted.

●To print on an insert, the insert must be counted

and it must be copied on.

LAST NUMBER

AUTO COVERS/INSERTS

COUNTING

COVERS/INSERTS COUNTING

COUNT FRONT COVER

COUNT INSERTS

COUNT BACK COVER

Front cover

image Back cover

image

Insert

image

NOTE

To cancel a page number setting...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the page number

selection screen. (The screen of step 10.)

LAST NUMBER

AUTO COVERS/INSERTS

COUNTING

CANCEL OK

TOTAL PAGE

AUTO

MANUAL

PAGE NUMBER

NOTES

●

Copying in group mode is not possible when page number printing is selected. The mode will automatically switch to sort mode.

●When the page number print position is set to the left or right side and "Pamphlet copy" or "Book copy" is

selected, the position of the page numbers will alternate so that they are always on the outside when the

pamphlet/book is opened. If a stamp is set in an area with a page numbering setting, the position of the stamp

will alternate in the same way.

If another item is set in a position that changes, that item will appear in the position that alternates with the page

number position.

Print menus not related to the alternating print positions will appear in their set positions.

[Example] When the page number format "1, 2, 3.." is selected when performing pamphlet copying of 4 pages,

the copies will appear as shown below.

In this example, the page number is at the bottom of the page and the date is at the top, so the

position of the date does not change.

Date

Page numbering

Text

Stamp

2010/APR/4 2010/APR/4

Print settings Front

2010/APR/4 2010/APR/4

Minutes of meeting

Back

Minutes of meetingMinutes of meetingMinutes of meeting

CONFIDENTIAL CONFIDENTIAL CONFIDENTIALCONFIDENTIAL

SPECIAL MODES

5-39

Examples of page number printing

Page number printing during one-sided copying (5 originals)

Page number printing during two-sided copying (9 originals)

Page number printing during one-sided copying of body pages with covers inserted (4 originals)

When a back cover is inserted, page numbers are counted and printed in the same way.

Note that page numbers are never printed on front and back covers.

Setting Value 1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page

TOTAL PAGE AUTO

FIRST NUMBER 1

LAST NUMBER AUTO

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET 1

Printed contents when

settings are changed as

follows

FIRST NUMBER: 11 11/15 12/15 13/15 14/15 15/15

FIRST NUMBER: 11

LAST NUMBER: 13 11/13 12/13 13/13

Not printed Not printed

TOTAL PAGE: 2 1/2 2/2

Not printed Not printed Not printed

TOTAL PAGE: 15

FIRST NUMBER: 11

LAST NUMBER: 13

11/15 12/15 13/15

Not printed Not printed

PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3

Not printed Not printed

1/3 2/3 3/3

1/5 B

2/5 C

3/5 D

4/5 E

5/5

Setting Value 1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page

Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back

TOTAL PAGE AUTO

FIRST

NUMBER 1

LAST NUMBER AUTO

PRINTING

STARTS FROM

SHEET

Printed contents

when settings

are changed as

follows

PRINTING

STARTS

FROM

SHEET: 3

Not

printed

Not

printed

Not

printed

Not

printed 1/52/53/54/55/5Not

printed

1/9 B

2/9 C

3/9 D

4/9 E

5/9 F

6/9 G

7/9 H

8/9 I

9/9

Setting Value

1st page

(Front

cover)

2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page

TOTAL PAGE AUTO

FIRST NUMBER 1

LAST NUMBER AUTO

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET 1

COUNT FRONT COVER

Not selected

Printed contents when

settings are changed

as follows

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET: 2

Not printed Not printed

1/3 2/3 3/3

COUNT FRONT

COVER: Selected

Not printed

(count) 2/5 3/5 4/5 5/5

COUNT FRONT

COVER: Selected

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET: 2

Not printed

(count) 1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

1/4 B

2/4 C

3/4 D

4/4

SPECIAL MODES

5-40

Page number printing during two-sided copying of body pages with covers (one-side copying) inserted (9 originals)

When a back cover is inserted, page numbers are counted and printed in the same way.

Note that page numbers are never printed on front and back covers.

Page number printing during one-sided copying with inserts (4 originals; 5 originals when copying on inserts)

When inserts are not copied on, the page number is not printed.

Page number printing during two-sided copying of body pages with inserts (one-side copying) (9 originals)

Setting Value

1st page

(front cover) 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page

Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back

TOTAL PAGE

AUTO

FIRST NUMBER

LAST NUMBER

AUTO

PRINTING

STARTS

FROM SHEET

COUNT FRONT

COVER

Not selected

Printed

contents

when

settings are

changed as

follows

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET: 3

Not

printed Not

printed 1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

COUNT FRONT

COVER: Selected

Not printed

(count) Not printed

(count)

3/10 4/10 5/10 6/10 7/10 8/10 9/10 10/10

COUNT FRONT

COVER: Selected

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET: 3

Not

printed

(count)

Not

printed

(count)

Not

printed Not

printed 1/62/63/64/65/66/6

A B

1/8 C

2/8 D

3/8 E

4/8 F

5/8 G

6/8 H

7/8 I

8/8

Setting Value 1st page 2nd page 3rd page

(insert) 4th page 5th page

TOTAL PAGE AUTO

FIRST NUMBER 1

LAST NUMBER AUTO

PRINTING STARTS FROM

SHEET 1

COUNT INSERTS Not selected

Printed contents when

copying on inserts and

settings are changed as

follows

PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3

Not printed Not printed Not printed

1/2 2/2

COUNT INSERTS: Selected 1/5 2/5

3/5 (count)

4/5 5/5

COUNT INSERTS: Selected

PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3

Not printed Not printed 1/3 (count)

2/3 3/3

Printed contents when not

copying on inserts and

settings are changed as

follows

COUNT INSERTS: Selected 1/5 2/5

Not printed

(count)

4/5 5/5

COUNT INSERTS: Selected

PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3

Not printed Not printed Not printed

(count)

2/3 3/3

1/4 B

2/4 C D

3/4 E

4/4

Setting Value 1st page 2nd page 3rd page

(insert) 4th page 5th page

Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back

TOTAL PAGE AUTO

FIRST NUMBER 1

LAST NUMBER AUTO

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET

COUNT INSERTS Not selected

Printed contents

when settings are

changed as follows

COUNT

INSERTS:

Selected 1/10 2/10 3/10 4/10 5/10 Not

printed

(count) 7/10 8/10 9/10 10/10

1/8 B

2/8 C

3/8 D

4/8 E F

5/8 G

6/8 H

7/8 I

8/8

SPECIAL MODES

5-41

■Printing entered text on copies

Entered text can be printed on copies. Up to 50 characters can be printed.

Up to 30 sequences of frequently used text can be stored. See "Storing text sequences" (page 5-42).

1Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-33).

2Touch the [TEXT] key.

3If you wish to use one of the preset text

sequences, touch the [RECALL] key. To

directly enter the text, touch the [DIRECT

ENTRY] key.

If you touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key, a character

entry screen will appear. For information on

entering characters, see page 7-29. When

finished, click the [OK] key to close the character

entry screen. (Go to step 6.)

4The stored text sequences will appear as

keys. Touch the key of the desired text

sequence.

The selected text sequence key is highlighted.

If the desired text sequence key does not appear,

change screens with the or key.

The display is initially set to show 6 keys per

screen. This can be changed to 3 keys per screen

by touching the [3 6] key. When 3 keys are

displayed, the entire text sequence will appear in

each key. (When 6 keys are displayed, up to 22

characters appear in each key.)

5Touch the [OK] key.

To edit the selected text

sequence, touch the

[DIRECT ENTRY] key

to display the character

entry screen. The

selected text sequence

is entered. For

information on entering characters, see page 7-29.

When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the

character entry screen.

6Select the pages to be printed on.

Select whether to print

on only the first page,

or all pages. The

touched key is

highlighted.

7Touch the [OK] key.

8Continue from step 4 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-33).

NOTE

When the machine is connected to a network, the printed text sequences can be stored and deleted in the Web

page. For details, see Help in the Web page.

PAGE

NUMBERING

CANCEL

LAYOUT

STAMP

DATE

TEXT

1/2

TEXT OK

CANCEL

FIRST PAGE

PRE-SET

ALL PAGES

DIRECT ENTRYSTORE/DELETERECALL

TEXT

RECALL

No.01 TARO YAMADA

No.02 Meeting

No.03

No.04

No.05

No.06

36DIRECT ENTRY

1/5

CANCEL

NOTE

To cancel a text setting...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the text print screen. (The

screen of step 7.)

CANCEL

DIRECT ENTRY

1/5

CANCEL

FIRST PAGE

DIRECT ENTRY

ALL PAGES

CANCEL

FIRST PAGE

DIRECT ENTRY

ALL PAGES

SPECIAL MODES

5-42

Storing text sequences

1Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-33).

2Touch the [TEXT] key.

3Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.

4Touch a key that has not been

programmed (a key in which No. xx

appears).

When touched, the character entry screen

appears. Enter the text (max. 50 characters). For

information on entering characters, see page 7-29.

When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the

character entry screen.

If no free keys appear, change screens with the

or key.

5Touch the [BACK] key.

The entered text is

stored.

Editing and deleting stored text

1Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-33).

2Touch the [TEXT] key.

3Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.

4Touch the text key that you wish to edit or

delete.

To edit the text, touch the [AMEND] key. To

delete the text, touch the [DELETE] key.

When the [AMEND] key is

touched, the character

entry screen appears.

The selected text

sequence is entered. For

information on entering

characters, see page

. When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the

character entry screen.

If you touch the [DELETE] key, the text will be deleted

and you will return to the screen of step 4.

To cancel editing or deletion, touch the [CANCEL] key.

6Touch the [BACK] key.

PAGE

NUMBERING

CANCEL

LAYOUT

STAMP

DATE

TEXT

1/2

RECALL STORE/DELETE

PRE-SET

TEXT

STORE/DELETE

No.01 TARO YAMADA

No.02 Meeting

No.03

No.04

No.05

No.06

BACK

1/5

36BACK

1/5

04 Minutes of meeting

PAGE

NUMBERING

CANCEL

LAYOUT

STAMP

DATE

TEXT

1/2

RECALL STORE/DELETE

PRE-SET

TEXT

STORE/DELETE

No.01 TARO YAMADA

No.02 Meeting

No.03

No.04 Minutes of meeting

No.05

No.06

BACK

1/5

A TEXT HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED TO

LOCATION. CHANGE THE TEXT?

No.06

CANCEL DELETE AMEND

36BACK

1/5

04 Minutes of meeting

SPECIAL MODES

5-43

■Checking and changing the print layout

You can check the print layout after the print items have been selected. If needed you can change the print

position or delete print content.

1Touch the [LAYOUT] key on the print menu

screen.

2Touch the key in which you wish to change

the print position or delete print content.

3To change the print position, touch the

[MOVE] key. To delete print content, touch

the [DELETE] key.

If you touched the

[MOVE] key, the new

position selection

screen appears.

If you touched the

[DELETE] key, the print

content is deleted. (Go

to step 6.)

4Touch the key of the new position.

The selected key is

highlighted and the

print position changes

to the new position.

The keys indicating the print position appear as

follows depending on the state of the setting:

5Touch the [OK] key.

If you attempt to move

print content to a

position that already

has print content set, a

message will appear

asking you if you wish

to overwrite the

previously set content.

To overwrite the content, touch the [YES] key. To

cancel the move and return to the condition before

the [OK] key was touched, touch the [NO] key.

6Touch the [OK] key.

NOTE

Up to 14 characters of the print text appears in the

key.

CANCEL

STAMP

TEXT

LAYOUT

DATE

PAGE

NUMBERING

LAYOUT

TARO YAMADA

CONFIDENTIAL

DO NOT COPY

1,2,3..

DO YOU WANT TO MOVE OR DELETE THE

SELECTED ITEM?

CANCEL DELETE MOVE

1,2,3..

Print position without any set print

menus.

Currently set print position.

Print position with another competing

print menu set.

(When moving a stamp, this indicates

that another stamp has been set. When

moving a print menu other than a stamp,

this indicates that the date, page number,

or text has been set.)

NOTE

If you wish to swap the contents of two positions,

temporarily move the content of one position to an

unused position and then complete the swap.

SELECTED ITEM.

DO NOT COPY

1,2,3..

CONFIDENTIAL

5-44

STORING, USING AND DELETING

JOB PROGRAMS

The steps of up to 10 copy jobs can be stored as job programs. Job programs can be called up with ease, and are

retained even when the power is turned off. By storing frequently used copy settings in a job program, you can

eliminate the bother of selecting the settings each time you use them for a copy job.

●If any settings related to the steps of a job program are changed in the administrator settings after the job program

is stored, the steps related to the changed settings will not be included when the job program is called up.

●To exit the job programs mode, press the [CA] (clear all) key on the operation panel or touch the [EXIT] key on the

touch panel.

Storing a job program

1Press the [#/P] key.

2Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.

3Touch the number key ([1] to [10]) in which

you wish to stored the job program.

Number keys in which

job programs are

already stored are

highlighted.

4Select the copy settings that you wish to

store in the job program.

The number of copies

cannot be stored.

5Touch the [OK] key.

The selected settings

will be stored in the

number key selected in

step 3.

■If a number key is selected in step 3 that has

already been programmed.

A setting confirmation screen will appear. To replace

the existing program with the new program, touch

the [STORE] key and continue from step 4. If you do

not wish to replace the existing program, touch the

[CANCEL] key to return to the screen of step 3 and

select a different number key.

LOGOUT

M NUMBER.

RECALL STORE/DELETE

PROGRAMS

ESS PROGRAM NUMBER.

RECALL STORE/

SPECIAL MODES

TO STORE, MAKE SELECTIONS AND PRESS

[OK], TO DELETE, PRESS [CANCEL].

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

NOTE

If overwriting of programmed copy settings has been

prohibited in the administrator settings, it will not be

possible to store or delete a job program. (See page

17 of the administrator settings guide.)

AUTO

ORIGINAL

OKNCEL

STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB PROGRAMS

5-45

Calling up a job program

1Press the [#/P] key.

2Touch the number key of the desired job

program.

The screen

automatically closes and

the job program is called

up. A number key that

does not have a job

program cannot be

selected.

3Set the number of copies if needed and

then press the [START] key.

Copying will begin using

the settings of the job

program.

Deleting a stored job program

1Press the [#/P] key.

2Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.

3Select a storage register number of the

program to be deleted.

If a number key for which

no job program has been

stored is selected, the

screen will change to the

screen of step 4 on the

previous page for storing

a job program.

4Touch the [DELETE] key.

The selected program is

deleted and you return

to the screen of step 3.

To return to the screen of

step 3 without deleting

the job program, touch

the [CANCEL] key. In

both cases, touch the

[EXIT] key on the screen displayed in the screen of

step 3 to exit the job program mode.

LOGOUT

JOB PROGRAMS

PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER.

RECALL

LOGOUT

M NUMBER.

RECALL STORE/DELETE

EXIT

STORE/DELETE

NOTE

If overwriting of programmed copy settings has been

prohibited in the administrator settings, it will not be

possible to store or delete a job program. (See page

17 of the administrator settings guide.)

RECALL STORE/DELETE

A JOB PROGRAM HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED

IN THIS LOCATION.

CANCEL DELETE STORE

5-46

INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN

The copy of the original scanned in interrupt mode is output before the remainder of the interrupted copy job.

1Touch the [INTERRUPT] key.

If interrupt copying is

possible during a copy

run, the [INTERRUPT]

key will appear. (If the

key does not appear,

interrupt copying is not

possible.)

When the [INTERRUPT]

key is touched in step 1,

the [INTERRUPT] key

will be replaced by the

[CANCEL] key as shown

in the illustration.

To cancel an interrupt

copy job while the interrupt original is being

scanned or while you are selecting copy settings,

touch the [CANCEL] key.

2Place the original for the interrupt copy job

in the document feeder or on the

document glass (page 4-3).

3Select the exposure mode, paper size,

number of copies, and any other copy

settings as needed, and then press the

[START] key.

4The previous copy job automatically

resumes after the interrupt job finishes.

NOTES

●If you touch the [INTERRUPT] key when auditing

mode is enabled, the display will prompt you to

enter your account number. Enter your account

number with the numeric keys. The copies you

make will be added to the count of the entered

account number.

●If a copy is being printed when the [INTERRUPT]

key is pressed, interrupt mode will begin after the

copy is finished.

●If the copy run to be interrupted is using paper

from the bypass tray, the paper size and type of the

bypass tray cannot be changed for use by the

interrupt job.

●If the document glass is used for an interrupt copy

job, two-sided copying, sort copying, and staple

sort copying cannot be selected. If any of these

functions are necessary, use the document feeder.

AUTO

AUTO A4

ORIGINA

EXPOSUR

INTERRUPT

AUTO

EXPOSURE

AUTO A4

PAPER SELECT

100%

COPY RATIO

CANCEL

ORIGINAL

6-1

CHAPTER 6

MACHINE MAINTENANCE

(FOR COPYING)

This chapter explains procedures for cleaning the machine, and

troubleshooting.

Page

USER MAINTENANCE........................................................................... 6-2

●

Cleaning the document glass and the automatic document feeder .......

6-2

TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................ 6-3

6-2

USER MAINTENANCE

To ensure good service from this product over a long period of time, it is recommended that the following

maintenance procedures be performed on a regular basis.

Cleaning the document glass and the automatic document

feeder

If the document glass, document cover or automatic document scanning unit have dirty spots, these spots will form

lines in scanned images. These will show up as defects when the images are printed. Always keep these parts clean.

Wipe with a clean, soft cloth. If necessary, moisten the

cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent.

When finished, wipe dry with a clean cloth. If black or white stripes

appear on printed

images of originals that

were fed through the

automatic document

feeder, wipe the long

narrow glasses in the

scanning unit ( and in the illustration).

CAUTION

Do not use flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical

components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.

NOTE

When cleaning, do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents.

Example of dirty print image

Black stripes White stripes

6-3

TROUBLESHOOTING

Check the following troubleshooting list before requesting service as many problems can be fixed by the user. If you

are unable to solve the problem by checking the list, turn off the main power switch and the power switch, and unplug

the power cord.

Problems related to the copy function are described below. For problems related to general use of the machine, see

page 2-32.

Problem Check Solution

Machine does not

operate.

Is the [START] key indicator off? This indicates that the machine is warming

up (warming up lasts no more than 120

seconds after the power switch is turned on).

Copying is not possible during this time. Wait

until the [START] key light illuminates.

Copies are too dark

or too light.

Is the original image too dark or too light? Select an appropriate exposure mode for the

original being copied and adjust the copy

exposure. (See page 4-14.)

Is the exposure mode set to "AUTO"? The exposure level for "AUTO" can be

adjusted using "Exposure adjustment" in the

administrator settings. Contact your

administrator. (See page 16 of the

administrator settings guide.)

An appropriate exposure mode for the

original has not been selected.

Change the exposure mode to "AUTO" or

manually select an appropriate resolution

setting. (See page 4-14.)

Text is not clear on a

copy.

An appropriate exposure mode for the

original has not been selected.

Change the exposure mode to "TEXT". (See

page 4-14.)

Smudges appear on

copies.

Document glass or document cover dirty? Clean regularly. (See page 6-2.)

Black lines appear on copies when the

automatic document feeding function is

used.

Clean the original scanning area. (See page

6-2.)

Original smudged or blotchy? Use a clean original.

Image cannot be

rotated.

Is the auto paper select or auto image

function selected?

Rotation copy functions only if the machine

is either in the auto paper select mode or in

the auto image mode. (See page 4-15.)

Part of original

image is not copied.

Is the original positioned correctly? Set the original properly. (See page 4-3.)

Is the copy ratio proper for the original and

paper sizes?

Use the auto image function to select the

appropriate copy ratio based on the original

and copy sizes. (See page 4-15.)

Blank copies Is the original placed correctly? When using the document glass, place the

original face down.

When using the automatic document feeder,

place original face up. (See page 4-3.)

Order of copies

incorrect

Is the order of originals correct? When using the document glass, place the

originals from the first page one sheet at a

time.

When using the automatic document feeder,

place the originals with the first page up.

Job cancellation

needed

Is a message requesting cancellation of job

displayed?

Press the [CA] key to cancel the current job.

7-1

CHAPTER 7

DOCUMENT FILING

FUNCTION

Page

OVERVIEW ............................................................................................. 7-2

●Document filing function.................................................................. 7-2

TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION..................................... 7-4

●A look at the operation panel .......................................................... 7-4

●Saving files...................................................................................... 7-4

●Main screen of document filing ....................................................... 7-5

●Document filing icons...................................................................... 7-5

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE .................................................... 7-6

●Quick File ........................................................................................ 7-6

●Filing................................................................................................ 7-7

●Print jobs ......................................................................................... 7-9

●Scan Save....................................................................................... 7-10

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE.......................................................... 7-13

●Searching for and calling up a saved file......................................... 7-13

●Calling up and using a saved file..................................................... 7-15

SYSTEM SETTINGS .............................................................................. 7-24

●Creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders.................. 7-24

ENTERING CHARACTERS.................................................................... 7-29

TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................ 7-31

7-2

OVERVIEW

Document filing function

The document filing function allows you to save a document image in the machine's hard disk as a data file. The

image can be called up and printed or transmitted as needed.

The scanned document image is saved when printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or

image send mode ("QUICK FILE" or "FILE"). A document can also be scanned and saved without being printed,

copied, or transmitted ("scan save").

To allow you to search for the file and call it up, names (user name, file name, etc.) can be assigned to the file (except

when using Quick File).

■Data flow

File 1

File 2

QUICK FILE FOLDER

File 1

File 2

MAIN FOLDER CUSTOM FOLDER

A password

can be set

A password

can be set

A password

can be set

Folder 1

Folder 2

Folder 3 File 1

File 2

Machine hard disk

Save to machine's

hard disk

HDD

and

Send

(facsimile or image send

function must be required)

Printing in copy mode (Quick

File saving, page 7-6)

Printing from a computer (printer

data, page 7-9)

Transmission in fax/image send

mode (filing, page 7-7)

Scanning a document only

(scan save, page 7-10)

Data is saved by job A user name and file name is

specified for each saved job

A user name and file name can

be specified for each file and

the file saved to a folder with

any desired name assigned.

Call up a saved

file to reuse it.

●A stored file can be moved to a different folder under certain conditions (page 7-22).

OVERVIEW

7-3

■Quick File folder

When [QUICK FILE FOLDER] is selected in the main screen of any of the modes, the file is saved in this folder.

Up to 1000 files can be saved in the Quick File folder. All files in the Quick File Folder can be deleted using the

administrator settings. If you have a file that you do not want deleted, set the file attribute to [PROTECT] (up to 500

files can be protected). (See [Property change] on page 7-21)

The following user and file names are automatically assigned (the names cannot be selected):

User name : User unknown

File name (example) : COPY_04042010_113050AM (job mode and month, day, year, hour, minute, second, AM/

PM of save). (In the example, the file was saved on 4/4/2010 at 11:30 and 50 sec in copy mode.)

When saved, jobs are classified by mode. A saved job can be called up from the COMPLETE job status screen.

■Main folder

When saving a file, a previously stored user name (see [SYSTEM SETTINGS] on page 7-24) can be specified and

any file name can be assigned.

A password can also be set for a saved file ([CONFIDENTIAL] save). (See [Property change] on page 7-21.)

If a user name and file name are not selected, a name in the same format as Quick File is automatically assigned.

■Custom folder

Up to 500 folders (named as desired) can be created in this folder. When saving a file in one of these folders, a

previously stored user name (see [SYSTEM SETTINGS] on page 7-24) can be specified and any file name can be

assigned.

A password can be set for a file saved in one of these folders.

■Attributes of saved files

The protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function. This prevents a file from being

moved or automatically or manually deleted.

Three attributes are available for saved files: [SHARING], [PROTECT], and [CONFIDENTIAL]. When saved with

the [SHARING] attribute, a file is not protected. When saved with the [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL] attribute, a

file is protected.

Files saved to the Quick File folder are all [SHARING]. When saving a file to the main folder or a custom folder,

[SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL] can be selected.

●A [SHARING] file can be changed to a [PROTECT]

or [CONFIDENTIAL]

file using

[Property change] (page 7-21).

●A password is set for a [CONFIDENTIAL] file to protect it. (The password must be entered to call up the file.)

●A password cannot be set for a [PROTECT] file, however, as long as the file is not changed to [SHARING] with

[PROPERTY CHANGE], the file will be protected.

CAUTION

●Documents saved with [QUICK FILE] are shared files that can be called up by anyone and printed or transmitted. For this

reason, do not use Quick File for sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be reused by others.

●When saving a document with [FILE], set the attribute to [CONFIDENTIAL] and set a password to prevent others from

reusing the document.

●Even when a file is saved with the [CONFIDENTIAL] attribute, the attribute can be changed afterward to [SHARING] using

[Property change] (page 7-21). For this reason, do not save sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be

reused by others.

●Except in cases provided for by law, SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages that result from the

leaking of sensitive information due to 1) manipulation by a third party of any data saved using the Quick File function or

filing function, or 2) incorrect operation of the Quick File function or filing function by the operator that saves the data.

7-4

TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION

A look at the operation panel

Touch panel (see the next page)

This displays messages and keys. Keys can be

touched to select and enter settings.

When a key is touched, a beep will sound and the

key will be highlighted to indicate that it is selected.

When a key cannot be selected in a screen, it will

be greyed out. If touched, a warning beep will

sound to alert you that it cannot be selected.

Mode select keys

Use this key to select the mode.

[DOCUMENT FILING] key

Touch this key to display the main screen of

document filing mode.

Numeric keys

Use these keys to enter a password or a numeric

value for a setting.

[C] key (Clear key)

Use this key if you make a mistake when entering a

password or numeric setting.

This key is also used to cancel scanning of a

document.

[CA] key (Clear all key)

Use this key to cancel a setting procedure and

return to the main screen. The key is also used to

cancel a special function.

[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key

Use this key to store, edit or delete a user name or

custom folder.

Saving files

To save files to the main folder or custom folders, a user name must be previously stored. To create a folder in the

custom folder, the folder name must be stored. These settings are configured in the system settings.

Follow the procedures explained in "Programming a user name", "Editing and deleting a user name", "Creating a

custom folder", and "Editing/deleting a custom folder" on pages 7-25 to 7-28.

LOGOUT

DOCUMENT

FILING

IMAGE SEND

COPY

JOB STATUS SYSTEM

SETTINGS

LINE

DATA

READY

DATA

TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION

7-5

Main screen of document filing

To display the main screen of document filing, press

the [DOCUMENT FILING] key when the touch panel

shows the copy mode screen, image send mode, or the

job status screen.

The main screen shows messages, keys, and items

that can be selected for document filing.

Message display

Displays messages.

[SCAN TO HDD] key

Touch to select scan save. Scan save is used to

save the image file of a scanned document in the

main folder or a custom folder without printing or

transmitting the document.

[FILE FOLDER] key

Touch to call up a file from the main folder or the

custom folder.

When the key is touched, the files in

the main folder or the folders in the custom folder

appear.

[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key

Touch to call up a file from the Quick File folder.

When the key is touched, the files in the Quick File

folder appear.

[SEARCH] key

Touch to search for a file by user name, file name,

or folder name.

[HDD STATUS] key

Touch to check the use of the machine's hard disk.

Document filing icons

The following icons may appear added to a main icon

or alone.

HDD STATUS

SCAN TO HDD FILE

FOLDER

QUICK FILE

FOLDER

FILE RETRIEVE

FILE STORE

GLOBAL ACCESS

Main

icon

Icon of

confidential

file or folder

Icon of

protected

file

Meaning

Folder

Copy job file

Print job file

(including direct

print jobs)

Fax transmission

job file

PC-FAX

transmission job

file

Internet fax

transmission job

file

PC-Internet fax

transmission job

file

Scan save file

E-mail

transmission job

file

FTP

transmission job

file

Desktop

transmission job

file

Network Folder

transmission job

file

Icon

Meaning

Confidential file or folder

Protected file

NOTE

When the file of a job that was saved using scan save

is printed in job settings, the icon of the job is

highlighted.

7-6

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

Quick File

When printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or fax/image transmission mode,"QUICK

FILE" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Quick File folder.

The image can be called up at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate

the original.

1Place the original in the document feeder

and select resolution and exposure

settings.

See steps 1 to 8 of

"Making copies with the

automatic document

feeding function" on

pages 4-7 to 4-8 and

"ADJUSTING THE

EXPOSURE" on page 4-

14.

2Touch the [QUICK FILE] key in the main

screen.

The [QUICK FILE] key

will be highlighted to

indicate that the function

is selected.

If the [FILE] key is

greyed out, only the

[QUICK FILE] key can

be selected.

When you touch the [QUICK FILE] key, a message

asking you to confirm the save will appear. Touch

the [OK] key in the message screen and go to the

next step.

If you wish to cancel the save, touch the [QUICK

FILE] key after touching the [OK] key so that the

[QUICK FILE] key is no longer highlighted.

3Press the [START] key on the operation

panel.

To prevent accidental

saving of the document,

the warning "THE

SCANNED DATA IS

STORED IN THE

QUICK FILE FOLDER."

appears for 6 seconds

after the [START] key is pressed.

When copying begins, the image is saved.

4The saved image can be called up from the

Quick File folder or the job status screen.

●To call the image up from the Quick File folder,

see "Calling up and using a saved file" on

page 7-15.

●To call the job up from the finished job status

screen, see "Calling up and manipulating a

file from the job status screen" on page 7-23.

5The following operations can be

performed on the image that was called up

in step 4.

●Print the image (page 7-17)

●Transmit the image (page 7-20)

●Change the attribute (page 7-21)

●Move the image (page 7-22)

●Delete the image (page 7-22)

●Check details on the image (page 7-22)

NOTE

As an example, the procedure for saving a document to the Quick File folder while copying using the automatic

document feeding function is explained below.

AUTO

ORIGINAL

EXPOSURE

QUICK FILE

FILE

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

7-7

Filing

When printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or image send mode, "FILE" can be selected

to save an image of the document to the main folder or a previously created custom folder. The image can be called

up at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate the original.

1Place the original in the document feeder

and select resolution and exposure

settings.

See steps 1 to 8 of

"Making copies with the

automatic document

feeding function" on

pages 4-7 to 4-8 and

"ADJUSTING THE

EXPOSURE" on page 4-

14.

2Touch the [FILE] key in the main screen.

An information entry

screen appears.

3Touch the [USER NAME] key.

4Touch the desired user name in the list of

user names that appears.

User names must be previously stored

("Programming a user name" on page 7-25).

5Touch the [OK] key.

The touched user name is selected and you return to the

screen of step 3. The selected user name appears.

6Touch the [FILE NAME] key.

A character entry screen

appears. Enter a file

name (maximum of 30

characters). (See page

7-29 to enter

characters.)

7Touch the [STORED TO:] key.

8Touch the desired folder name in the list of

folder names that appears

Folder names must be previously stored.

("Creating a custom folder" on page 7-27). If a

password has been set for the folder, a password

entry screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit

password for the folder.

NOTE

As an example, the procedure for using the filing function while copying using the automatic document feeding

function is explained below.

AUTO

ORIGINAL

EXPOSURE

QUICK FILE

FILE

USER NAME

CONFIDENTIAL

MAI

COPY

FILE NAME

STORED TO:

Suzuki

Ono

Hasegawa

Sasaki

UVWXYZOPQRSTJKLMNEFGHIABCD

ALL USERS

Yamada

Nakata

1/1

NOTE

If you do not select a user name, the following name

is automatically selected:

Example : User unknown

NOTE

If you do not enter a file name, a file name in the

following format is automatically assigned:

Auto generated file name : Month, day, year, hour,

minute, second, AM/PM

(Example : COPY_04042010_113050AM)

USER NAME

FILE NAME

STORED TO: MAI

COPY

USER NAME

FILE NAME

STORED TO: MAIN

COPY

ALL FOLDERS

CUSTOM FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER 3

CUSTOM FOLDER 5

CUSTOM FOLDER 7

CUSTOM FOLDER 6

CUSTOM FOLDER 4

CUSTOM FOLDER 2

CUSTOM FOLDER 8

ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRS UVWXY

1/2

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

7-8

9Touch the [OK] key.

The touched folder is

selected and you return

to the screen of step 5.

The selected folder

name is displayed.

If needed, select the [CONFIDENTIAL]

checkbox (only in copy mode).

When this is selected, the

file is stored with the

attribute [CONFIDENTIAL].

To call up the file, the

password that will be set in

the following steps must be

entered.

●If you selected the [CONFIDENTIAL]

checkbox, touch the [PASSWORD] key and

enter a password.

●If you did not select the [CONFIDENTIAL]

checkbox, go to step 16. The file will be saved

as a [SHARING] file.

Touch the [PASSWORD] key.

The password entry

screen appears.

Enter a 5-digit password with the numeric

keys.

As each digit is entered,

" changes to " ".

Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the screen of step 4. The

set password is displayed with " ".

Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the main screen.

Press the [START] key on the operation

panel.

When copying begins,

the image is saved.

The saved image can be called up using

the file name, folder name, or user name,

or from the filing folder.

●To call up the image by entering the file name,

folder name, or user name, see "Searching for

and calling up a saved file" on page 7-13.

●To call up the image from the filing folder, see

"Calling up and using a saved file" on page 7-

15.

The following operations can be

performed on the image that was called

up:

●Print the image (page 7-17)

●Transmit the image (page 7-20)

●Change the attribute (page 7-21)

●Move the image (page 7-22)

●Delete the image (page 7-22)

●Check details on the image (page 7-22)

FOLDER

2/2

USER NAME

FILE NAME

CONFIDENTIAL

FILE INFORMATION

PASSWORD

CAN

XYYY

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

CANCEL

10-KEY PAD.

XYYY

CANCEL

PASSWORD

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

7-9

Print jobs

Print jobs sent to the machine using the machine's

printer driver can be saved in the main folder or a

previously created custom folder when printed. The

saved print data can be called up and printed or

transmitted without having to open the original file on

your computer.

This section gives an overview of this function and

explains the procedure for printing from the operation

panel of the machine.

For the procedures that are performed at your

computer when initiating printing such as selecting the

save location and file attribute, see the printer driver

Help file.

■Using a print job file (printing,

deleting, transmitting, etc.)

1Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the

operation panel.

2Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key or the

[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key depending on

where the file is saved.

●Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key if the file is

saved in the main folder or the custom folder.

Touch the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key if the

file is saved in the Quick File folder.

If you touched the [FILE FOLDER] key, the

files in the main folder or the folders in the

custom folder appear. If you open the wrong

folder, touch the [MAIN FOLDER] key or the

[CUSTOM FOLDER] key and open the

correct folder.

●If the desired file is saved in the main folder,

go to step 4. If the desired file is saved in a

custom folder, go to step 3.

●If you touched the [QUICK FILE FOLDER]

key, the files in the Quick File folder appear.

Go to step 4.

3Touch the key of the folder that contains

the desired file.

If a password is set for

the selected folder, a

password entry screen

will appear. Enter the 5-

digit password with the

numeric keys.

4Touch the printer icon ( ) tab and then

touch the key of the desired file.

The following screen appears if the [QUICK FILE

FOLDER] key is touched in step 2.

Touch the key of the file that you wish to call up. A

menu screen will appear.

If a password is set for the file, a password entry

screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit password with

the numeric keys.

5Touch the key of the operation that you

wish to perform.

(1) [PRINT] key (see page 7-17)

(2) [SEND] key (see page 7-20)

(3) [PROPERTY CHANGE] key (see page 7-21)

(4) [MOVE] key (see page 7-22)

(5) [DELETE] key (see page 7-22)

(6) [DETAIL] key (see page 7-22)

The setting screen of the selected operation

appears. See the indicated page.

DOCUMENT

FILING

IMAGE SEND

COPY

JOB STATUS SYSTEM

SETTINGS

LINE

DATA

READY

DATA

FILE

FOLDER

QUICK FILE

FOLDER

FILE RETRIEVE

HDD STATUS

OPQRSJKLMNEFGHIABCD

CUSTOM FOLDER

CUSTOM FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER 3

CUSTOM FOLDER 5

CUSTOM FOLDER 7

CUSTO

ALL FOLDERS

MAIN FOLDER

MAIN FOLDER SEARCHCUSTOM FOLDER BACK

1/1

FILE NAME

Basic Yamada 2003/10/01

2003/10/01

Sato

Akata

presentation

Product

PRINTS

USER NAME DATE

BATCH P.

QUICK FILE FOLDER SEARCH BACK

FILE NAME

Tanaka7890123456 User unknown 2003/10/01

2003/10/01

User unknown

Suzuki7890123456

PRINTS

USER NAME DATE 1

BATCH P.

(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5) (6)

SELECT THE JOB.

MOVE

SEND

DELETE

PROPERTY

CHANGE

DETAIL

JOB SETTINGS

Basic specifications Yamada Taro

CANCEL

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

7-10

Scan Save

Scan save is used to save a scanned document image in the main folder or the custom folder without copying or transmitting it.

1Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the

operation panel.

2Touch the [SCAN TO HDD] key.

3Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.

Select any special

functions that you wish

to use (otherwise skip

this step).

When the [SPECIAL

MODES] key is touched,

the special modes

selection screen appears. (See "Using special

functions for scan save" on page 7-12.)

4Touch the [FILE INFORMATION] key.

The screens for selecting the user name, file

name, folder, and attribute appear. Configure the

settings as explained in step 3 to step 15 on

pages 7-7 to 7-8. When step 15 is completed, you

will return to the main screen of document filing.

6Perform any of the following steps 7 to 16

as needed. When finished, go to step 17 on

page 7-11.

●To set the original size, perform steps 7 to 10.

●To set the resolution, perform steps 11 to 13

on page

7-11

●To select the exposure, perform steps 14 to 16

on page

7-11

●If you no not wish to select any of the above

settings, go to step 17 on page 7-11.

7Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.

8To set the original size, see "Manually

setting the scanning size" on page 4-5.

9If the original is two-sided, touch the [2-

SIDED BOOKLET] key or the [2-SIDED

TABLET] key depending on where the

pages are bound.

Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the

screen of step 7.

NOTE

For explanations of the special functions, see page

7-12 and chapter 5.

DOCUMENT

FILING

IMAGE SEND

COPY

JOB STATUS SYSTEM

SETTINGS

LINE

DATA

READY

DATA

SCAN TO HDD

FILE STORE

SPECIAL MODES

FILE

INFORMATION

FILE

INFORMATION

SPECIAL MODES

SCAN TO HDD FILE

FOLDER

QUICK FILE

FOLDER

FILE STORE FILE RETRIEVE

HDD STATUS

GLOBAL ACCESS

NOTE

If the original pages are bound at the side, the

document is a "booklet". If the original pages are

bound at the top, the document is a "tablet".

ORIGINAL

RESOLUTION

AUTO

300x300dpi

2-SIDED

BOOKLET

2-SIDED

TABLET

SCAN SIZE STORE SIZ

100%

AUTO AUTO

STORE SIZE

AUTO

IDED

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

7-11

Touch the [RESOLUTION] key.

Touch the key of the desired resolution.

Select one of four resolution levels as appropriate

for the original.

The selected resolution key is highlighted.

Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the

screen of step 11.

Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.

Select [AUTO] or [MANUAL].

To have the exposure

adjusted automatically,

select [AUTO].

If you selected

[MANUAL], touch the

or key to adjust

the exposure.

(For a darker image, touch

the key. For a lighter

image, touch the key.)

Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the

screen of step 14.

Place the original and touch the [START]

key.

[Placing the original]

●For information on placing the original, see

"NORMAL COPYING" in chapter 4.

●If you selected the "Card Shot" special function,

the document glass must be used.

●If you selected job build mode, the automatic

document feeding function must be used.

Scanning begins.

If you are using the

document glass, touch

the [READ-END] key

after all pages have

been scanned.

The saved image can be called up using

the file name, folder name, or user name,

or from the filing folder.

●To call up the image by entering the file name,

folder name, or user name, see "Searching for

and calling up a saved file" on page 7-13.

●To call up the image from the filing folder, see

"Calling up and using a saved file" on page 7-

15.

The following operations can be

performed on the image that was called up

in step 18:

●Print the image (page 7-17)

●Transmit the image (page 7-20)

●Change the attribute ((page 7-21)

●Move the image (page 7-22)

●Delete the image (page 7-22)

●Check details on the image (page 7-22)

ORIGINAL

RESOLUTION

EXPOSURE

AUTO

300x300dpi

PRESS

[START]

SCAN

ORIGINAL

SCAN TO HDD

EXPOSURE

ORIGINAL

RESOLUTION

200x200dpi O

400x400dpi

600x600dpi

300x300dpi

HALF TONE

AUTO

HALF TONE

ORIGINAL

RESOLUTION

EXPOSURE

AUTO

300x300dpi

MANUAL

AUTO

MANUAL

AUTO

NOTE

This completes the scan save procedure. Follow the

steps below when you wish to call up the image and

print or transmit it.

MANUAL

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

7-12

■Using special functions for scan save

Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main scan save screen to display the special modes screen.

The functions below can be selected in this screen.

[ERASE] key (see page 5-4)

Use this function to erase shadows that can appear

around the edges of the image when books and

other thick originals are scanned.

[DUAL PAGE SCAN] key (see page 5-5)

(Equivalent to Dual page copy in copy mode)

This function is used to save the opened pages of

a book in order one page at a time (left page then

right page).

[2in1] key (

see page 5-24

)

(When the fax or image send function is installed,

this corresponds to the 2in1 function explained in

the fax and network scanner manuals. This also

corresponds to the "Multishot" function in copy

mode, however, only "2in1" is possible for scan

save. )

This function reduces two original pages and

arranges the images on a single page in a uniform

layout.

[JOB BUILD] key (see page 5-8)

When you have more pages than can be placed in

the document feeder at once, this function allows

you to scan the pages in sets.

[CARD SHOT] key (see page 5-29)

This function allows you to save the front and back

side of a card on a single page (instead of saving

each side as a separate file).

ORIGINAL

RESOLUTION

BACK

SPECIAL MODES

FILE

INFORMATION

EXPOSURE

SCAN TO HDD

AUTO

READY TO SCAN TO HDD.

PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL.

300x300dpi

[READY TO SCAN TO HDD.

PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL.

SPECIAL MODES

ERASE DUAL PAGE

SCAN

CARD SHOT

JOB

BUILD

2in1

Touch the [SPECIAL MODES]

key in the main screen.

7-13

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

Searching for and calling up a saved file

When calling up a file, you can enter the file name, folder name, or user name to quickly search for the file.

To search for a file, touch the [SEARCH] key in the main screen of document filing mode or in a screen that shows

folders or files in a folder. A data search screen will appear.

■Procedure for searching for a file

1Touch the [SEARCH] key in the main

screen of document filing mode or in a

screen that shows folders or files in a

folder.

If you touch the

[SEARCH] key in the

screen that shows the

folders in the custom

folder or a screen that

shows the files in a

folder, the [SEARCH

WITHIN CURRENT FOLDER] checkbox will

appear. Select this checkbox to search for a file

only in the selected folder.

2In the data search screen, select whether

you will search by [USER NAME] or [FILE

OR FOLDER NAME].

●

To search by user name, follow steps 3 to 6.

●To search by file name or folder name,

perform step 8.

●To stop searching, touch the [CANCEL]key.

[Searching by user name]

3Touch the [USER NAME] key.

4Touch the one-touch key of the user name

that you wish to use to search for the file.

If you wish to directly enter the user name,

touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key.

●The selected user name is highlighted.

●If you select the wrong user name, touch the

key of the correct name.

●If you touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key, a

character entry screen will appear. Enter the

user name.

See page 7-29 for the procedure for entering

characters.

5Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the

screen of step 2 and the

selected user name will

appear.

6Touch the [START SEARCH] key.

HDD STATUS

FILE

FOLDER

CANCEL

USER NAME

FILE OR FOLDER NAME

START SEARCH

CANCEL

USER NAME

FILE OR FOLDER NAME

START SEARCH

SELECT USER NAME.

Suzuki

Ono

Hasegawa

Sasaki

CANCEL

DIRECT ENTRY

UVWXYZOPQRSTJKLMNEFGHIABCDALL USERS

Yamada

Nakata

CANCEL

DIRECT ENTRY

CANCEL START SEARCH

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-14

7The results of the user name search

appear. Touch the desired file name or

folder name.

●See page 7-5 for a list of the document filing

icons.

●When a file name is touched, the operation

selection screen appears. (To perform an

operation using the file, go to step 5 on

page 7-16.)

●When a folder name is touched, all files in the

folder are displayed. Touch the desired file.

(To perform an operation using the file, go

to step 5 on page 7-16.)

●To change the order of file display, touch the

[FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key, [USER

NAME] key, or [DATE] key.

If you touch a file name or folder name that

has a password, a password entry screen will

appear. Enter the 5-digit password with the

numeric keys.

[Searching by file or folder name]

8Touch the [FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key.

A character entry screen

appears. Enter the file

name or folder name to

be used for the search.

See page 7-29 to enter

characters.

9Touch the [START SEARCH] key.

The results of the file or folder name

search appear. Touch the desired file

name or folder name.

●See page 7-5 for a list of the document filing

icons.

●When a file name is touched, the operation

selection screen appears. (To perform an

operation using the file, go to step 5 on

page 7-16.)

●When a folder name is touched, all files in the

folder are displayed. Touch the desired file.

(To perform an operation using the file, go

to step 5 on page 7-16.)

●To change the order of file display, touch the

[FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key, [USER

NAME] key, or [DATE] key.

If you touch a file name or folder name that

has a password, a password entry screen will

appear. Enter the 5-digit password with the

numeric keys.

FILE OR FOLDER NAME USER NAME

AAA

Product SpecA

Product B

Product 2

2003/10/20

SEARCH AGAINCANCEL

DATE

USER NAME

FILE OR FOLDER NAME

CANCEL START SEARCH

FILE OR FOLDER NAME USER NAME

SEARCH AGAINCANCEL

DATE

Yamada

Sato

Akata

Product specifications

Products

Product_info

2002/12/30

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-15

Calling up and using a saved file

A file saved with the document filing function can be called up and printed or manipulated as needed.

The following operations can be performed:

● [Print] : Print the file (page 7-17).

● [Send] : Transmit the saved file (page 7-20). The file can be transmitted by Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to

Network Folder, fax, or Internet fax. (All of these methods require installation of the appropriate options.)

(Page 1-12)

● [Property change] : Change the attribute of the saved file (page 7-21).

● [Move] : Move the file (page 7-22).

● [Delete] : Delete the file (page 7-22).

● [Detail] : Show details on the saved file (page 7-22).

■General procedure for using a saved file

1Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the

operation panel.

2Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key or the

[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key depending on

where the file is saved.

●Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key if the file is

saved in the main folder or the custom folder.

Touch the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key if the

file is saved in the Quick File folder.

If you touched the [FILE FOLDER] key, the

files in the main folder or the folders in the

custom folder appear. If you open the wrong

folder, touch the [MAIN FOLDER] key or the

[CUSTOM FOLDER] key and open the

correct folder.

●If the desired file is saved in the main folder,

go to step 4. If the desired file is saved in a

custom folder, go to step 3.

●If you touched the [QUICK FILE FOLDER]

key, the files in the Quick File folder appear.

Go to step 4.

3Touch the key of the folder that contains

the desired file.

If there are more custom folder keys than can

appear in one screen, touch the or keys

to change screens.

If a password is set for the selected folder, a

password entry screen will appear. Enter the 5-

digit password with the numeric keys.

4Touch the desired file key.

Touch the key of the file that you wish to use.

(Parts of the screen that are framed in black are

keys that can be touched.)

A menu screen will appear.

If a password is set for the file, a password entry

screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit password with

the numeric keys.

DOCUMENT

FILING

IMAGE SEND

COPY

JOB STATUS SYSTEM

SETTINGS

LINE

DATA

READY

DATA

FILE

FOLDER

QUICK FILE

FOLDER

FILE RETRIEVE

HDD STATUS

UVWXYZOPQRSTJKLMNEFGHIABCD

CUSTOM FOLDER

CUSTOM FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER 3

CUSTOM FOLDER 5

CUSTOM FOLDER 7

CUSTOM FOLDER 2

CUSTOM FOLDER 4

CUSTOM FOLDER 6

CUSTOM FOLDER 8

ALL FOLDERS

MAIN FOLDER SEARCH BACK

1/1

MAIN FOLDER SEARCHCUSTOM FOLDER BACK

FILE NAME

Basic specifications Yamada 2003/10/20

2003/10/20

Sato

Akata

presentaion_0903

Product_info

COPY

USER NAME DATE

BATCH P.

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-16

5Touch the key of the operation that you

wish to perform.

(1) [PRINT] key (see page 7-17)

(2) [SEND] key (see page 7-20)

(3) [PROPERTY CHANGE] key (see page 7-21)

(4) [MOVE] key (see page 7-22)

(5) [DELETE] key (see page 7-22)

(6) [DETAIL] key (see page 7-22)

The setting screen of the selected operation

appears. See the indicated page.

FILE SELECTION SCREEN

The file selection screen of the Quick File folder, Main folder, and custom folders is explained below.

File keys

The stored files are displayed. An icon showing

which mode the file was stored from, the file name,

the user name, and the date the file was stored

appear in each file key.

When a file is touched, the job setting screen

appears.

[File Name] key, [User Name] key, [Date] key

Use these keys to change the order of display of

the file keys. When one of the keys is touched,

or appears in the key.

●When appears in the [File Name] key or [User

Name] key, the files appear by file name or user

name in ascending order.

When appears in the [Date] key, the files

appear in order from the oldest date.

●When appears in the [File Name] key or [User

Name] key, the files appear by file name or user

name in descending order.

When appears in the [Date] key, the files

appear in order from the most recent date.

[Back] key

Touch this key to return to the screen one level up.

Select displayed files by job type.

You can select the file keys that are displayed by

job type.

[ALL FILES] is initially selected.

Touch a tab to show a list of the files that were

stored from that mode.

[Batch Print] key

Touch this key to print all files in a folder.

For detailed information on batch printing, see 7-

18.

(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5) (6)

SELECT THE JOB.

MOVE

SEND

DELETE

PROPERTY

CHANGE

DETAIL

JOB SETTINGS

Basic specifications Yamada Taro

CANCEL

CUSTOM FOLDER SEARCH BACK

MAIN FOLDER

Basic specifications Yamada 2006/10/20

Products Sato 2006/10/20

Product_info Akata 2006/10/20

BATCH P.

ALL FILES

FILE NAME USER NAME DATE

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-17

■[Print]

A saved file can be printed.

The screen below appears when the [PRINT] key is selected in the operation selection screen. To begin printing,

touch the [PRINT] ( ) key. Printing settings can be selected in this screen before printing. The settings that were

in effect when the file was saved appear initially. The settings can be changed as needed.

[PAPER SELECT] key

Use this key to set the paper size.

[OUTPUT] key

Use this key to select sort, group or staple sort

functions, and to select the output tray.

[2-SIDED] key

When performing two-sided printing, use this key to

select the orientation of the image on the back side

of the paper. To have the front and back images

oriented in the same direction, touch the [2-SIDED

BOOKLET] key. To have the front and back images

oriented opposite to each other, touch the [2-

SIDED TABLET] key. Note that the size and

orientation of the saved image may cause these

keys to have the opposite effect. If neither key is

selected, one-sided printing will take place.

[TANDEM PRINT] key

If the conditions for tandem printing are met (page

5-10), touch this key to enable tandem printing.

See page 5-10 for more information.

[NUMBER OF PRINTS] setting key

Use this key to set the number of copies.

[PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA] key

Touch this key to print a file and then have it

automatically deleted.

[PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA] key

Touch this key to print a file. The file will not be

automatically deleted after printing.

NOTES

●When print settings are changed with this procedure, only the value for the number of copies is overwritten.

●The printing speed will be slower for image files saved using certain resolution settings. (See page 7-31.)

PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA

PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA

NUMBER OF PRINTS

CANCEL

(1~999)

PAPER SELECT

TANDEM PRINT

2-SIDED

OUTPUT

AUTO

JOB SETTINGS / PRINT

Basic specifications Yamada Taro A4

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-18

■Batch printing

All files in a folder that have the same user name and password can be printed at once.

1Touch the [BATCH P.] key in the file list

screen of document filing mode.

To print all files of a

specific type of job,

touch the desired job

tab. The files shown on

that tab can be printed

as a batch.

2Touch the [USER NAME] key.

3Touch the user name of the files that you

wish to print by batch printing.

4If a password has been established, touch

the [PASSWORD] key.

Enter the password with

the numeric keys (5 to 8

digits) and touch the

[OK] key. Only files that

have the same

password will be

selected.

If you do not wish to enter a password, go to the

next step.

5To set the number of copies, touch the

[CHANGE PRT.NO.] key.

If you wish to use the

number of copies stored

with each file, go to step

6Touch the [APPLY THE NUMBER FROM

STORED SETTING OF EACH JOB]

checkbox to remove the checkmark.

7Set the number of copies with the

keys.

The number of copies

can be also set with the

numeric keys.

NOTE

When [SELECTION OF [ALL USERS] IS NOT

ALLOWED.] checkbox and [SELECTION OF [USER

UNKNOWN] IS NOT ALLOWED.] are disabled in the

administrator settings, the [ALL USERS] key and

[USER UNKNOWN] key can be selected.

The [ALL USERS] key can be touched to select all

files in the folder (the files of all users).

The [USER UNKNOWN] key can be touched to

select all files in the folder that do not have a user

name.

2006/01/01

BATCH P.

USER NAME

PASSWORD

ALL FILES

BATCH PRINT

SELECT USER NAME.

ALL USERS

Hasegawa

Ono

Suzuki

USER UNKNOWN

CANCEL

UVWXYZOPQRSTJKLMNEFGHIABCDALL USERS

Nakata

Yamada

Sasaki 2

USER NAME

PASSWORD

Suzuki

CHANGE PRT.NO.

NT AND DELETE THE DATA

APPLY THE NUMBER FRO

EACH JOB

R FROM STORED SETTING OF

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-19

8Touch the [OK] key. 9Touch the [PRINT AND DELETE THE

DATA] key or the [PRINT AND SAVE THE

DATA] key.

If the [PRINT AND

DELETE THE DATA] key

is touched, the files will

be automatically deleted

after printing.

If the [PRINT AND SAVE

THE DATA] key is

touched, the files will be saved after printing.

If there are no files that match the search

conditions, you will return to the file list screen.

CANCEL OK

PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA

PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA

NOTES

●If "Auditing mode" is enabled in the administrator settings for copy mode, print mode, or document filing mode,

it will not be possible to perform batch printing of [ALL FILES].

●To display the job tab of a mode for which "Auditing mode" is enabled in the administrator settings, the account

number must be entered.

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-20

■[Send]

A saved file can be transmitted by Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder, fax, or Internet fax.

These transmission methods require installation of the appropriate options.

The following screen appears when the [SEND] key is touched. Select the destination and other settings required

for transmission and then touch the [SEND] ( ) key to transmit the file. Transmission settings include the

resolution and transmission functions such as a timer setting. Change or select these settings as needed.

[RESOLUTION] key

Use this key to set the resolution.

[FILE FORMAT] key

The [FILE FORMAT] key appears in scan mode

(Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, or Scan to Network

Folder). Touch this key to set the file format of scan

images that you transmit.

[FILE NAME/USER NAME] display

This shows the file name and user name of the file

to be transmitted.

[ ] key (Speed dial key)

Use this key to specify a destination by entering the

3-digit number that is assigned to an e-mail

address or fax number when it is stored in a one-

touch key or group key.

[MODE SWITCH] key

Use this key to select the transmission mode (Scan

to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder,

fax, or Internet fax).

[CANCEL] key

Touch this key to return to the operation selection

screen.

[ADDRESS BOOK] key

Touch this key to display the destinations stored in

the directory.

[ADDRESS REVIEW] key

Touch this key to display the destinations.

[SPECIAL MODES] key

Touch this key to display the special function menu.

The functions that can be selected vary depending

on the transmission mode:

●Scan to E-mail/FTP/Network Folder

TIMER : The transmission time can be specified.

●FAX

TIMER : The transmission time can be specified.

FAX OWN ADDRESS SENDING: Your sender's

information can be included on the fax pages

printed out by the receiving machine.

●Internet FAX

TIMER : The transmission time can be specified.

I-FAX OWN ADDRESS SEND: Your sender's

information can be included on the Internet fax

pages printed out by the receiving machine.

[SEND] key

Touch this key after selecting transmission settings

to begin transmission. (The [START] key can also

be pressed to begin transmission.)

NOTE

Jobs that use the following special functions cannot be transmitted when called up. (The [SEND] key is greyed out

in the operation selection screen.)

Pamphlet copying, covers/insert, card shot, Multi shot.

Jobs that use the following functions can be transmitted with certain restrictions when called up:

Card shot:Can be transmitted if saved by scan save or image send.

Multi shot (2in1):Can be transmitted if saved as 2in1 using a portrait original.

CANCEL

ADDRESS BOOK

ADDRESS REVIEW

SPECIAL MODES

MODE SWITCH

FAX

RESOLUTION

Basic specifications

Yamada Taro

STANDARD

SUB ADDRESS

SEND

[Example of FAX mode]

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-21

[SEND SETTINGS] key

The [SEND SETTINGS] key is displayed in

scanner mode and in Internet fax mode.

Touch this key to set the subject and file name. In

scanner mode, the sender name can also be set.

[SUB ADDRESS] key or [ADDRESS ENTRY] key

●Touch this key to directly enter the destination for

a Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network

Folder, or Internet fax transmission.

●Touch this key to enter the sub-address and

passcode for an F-code fax transmission.

■[Property change]

Select this operation to change the attribute of a saved file. Three attributes are available: [SHARING],

[PROTECT], and [ CONFIDENTIAL].

The following screen appears when the [PROPERTY CHANGE] key is selected in the operation selection screen.

Note the restrictions below on changing the attribute.

[Restrictions on changing the attribute]

●A file that is set to [SHARING] can be

changed to [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL].

However, a [SHARING] file that is saved in the

Quick File folder can only be changed to

[PROTECT].

●A file that is set to [PROTECT] can be

changed to [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL].

However, a [PROTECT] file that is saved in

the Quick File folder can only be changed to

[SHARING].

●A file that is saved in the Quick File folder

cannot be changed to [CONFIDENTIAL].

1Touch the [PROPERTY CHANGE] key in

the operation selection screen.

2Touch the key of the desired attribute.

If you are changing a

[SHARING] or

[PROTECT] file to

[CONFIDENTIAL],

touch the [PASSWORD]

key and enter the

password.

3Touch the [OK] key.

11 12

NOTE

See the "Operation manual (for facsimile)" and "Operation manual (for image send)" for detailed explanations of

, , , , , , , , , , and .

12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

11 12

JOB SETTINGS / PROPERTY CHANGE

Basic specifications Yamada Taro

CANCEL OK

SHARING

CONFIDENTIAL

PROTECT

PASSWORD

PROPERTY

CHANGE

DETAIL

SHARING

CONFIDENTIAL

PROTECT

PASSWORD

NCEL

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-22

■[Move]

This operation is used to move a file to a different

folder.

The following screen appears when the [MOVE]

key is selected.

Only [SHARING] and [CONFIDENTIAL] files can

be moved. A [PROTECT] file can be moved by first

using [PROPERTY CHANGE] to change the

attribute to [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL].

1Touch the [MOVE TO:] key and select the

folder to which you wish to move the file.

●Select the main folder or a folder in the

custom folder. A file cannot be moved to the

Quick File folder.

●The file name can be changed when moving a

file. To change the name, touch the [FILE

NAME] key and enter the desired file name.

See page 7-29 for the procedure for entering

characters.

2Touch the [OK] key.

3Touch the [MOVE] key.

4Touch the [CANCEL] key.

You will return to the

operation selection

screen.

■[Delete]

This operation is used to delete the selected file.

Touch the [DELETE] key in the operation select

screen. A message asking you to confirm the

deletion will appear. Touch the [YES] key to delete

the file.

Only [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL] files can be

deleted. (A [PROTECT] file can be deleted by first

using [PROPERTY CHANGE] to change the

attribute to [SHARING].)

■[Detail]

This operation is used to show detailed information

on the selected file.

Touch the [DETAIL] key to display the information.

The information appears on two screens. Touch the

key or key to move between the two

screens.

The file name can be changed in the information

screen. To change the name, touch the [FILE

NAME] key and enter the desired file name in the

character entry screen that appears. See page 7-

29 for the procedure for entering characters.

JOB SETTINGS / MOVE

SELECT THE FOLDER THE FILE IS MOVED TO.

FILE NAME

MOVE TO:

CANCEL

Basic specifications

Yamada Taro A4

MOVE

N FOLDER OK

OVED TO.

ations

amada Taro A4

MOVE

CANCEL

aro A4

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-23

■Calling up and manipulating a file from the job status screen

Files saved using the "FILE" and "QUICK FILE" functions appear as keys in the finished job status screen.

You can view information on a file that appears in this screen and manipulate the file.

1Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

The job status screen

appears.

2Touch the [COMPLETE] key.

The finished job screen

appears.

3Touch the key of the desired file.

If there are more keys

than can appear in one

screen and the desired

file does not appear,

touch the key or

key to change

screens.

The touched key is highlighted.

4To view information on the file, touch the

[DETAIL] key.

Use the keys

to change screens.

When you are finished,

touch the [OK] key to

return to the screen of

step 3.

5Touch the [CALL] key.

The operation selection

screen appears.

Select and perform the desired operation as

explained in "Calling up and using a saved file"

(page 7-15).

AGE SEND

COPY

JOB STATUS SYSTEM

SETTINGS

DATA

JOB QUEUE

DETAIL

1/8 COMPLETE

JOBS COMPLETED

Suzuki7890123456 14:09 12/09 00

COPY 13:27 12/09 00

COPY 14:38 12/09 00

Tanaka7890123456 14:38 12/09 01

SET TIME NUM

DETAIL

CALL

INTERNET FAXX JOB

FILE NAME:

DETAIL OF

COPY

COPY_20031021_153050

SIZE:A4

DATE:2003/10/10 15:30

RESOLUTION:600x600dpi

PAGES:10

CALL

1/2

FILE NAME

DETAIL OF

DATA SIZE: 21,987,543KB 1-SIDED

OUTPUT:

SPECIAL

MODES:

DOCUMENT

STYLE:

FILE FORMAT:

COPY_20031021_153050 CALL

COPY

2/2

CALL

INTERNET-FAXX JOB

7-24

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders

This section explains how to create, edit, and delete user names and custom folders for saving files with the

document filing function. User names and custom folders are created and edited at the operation panel of the

machine or in the Web page.

■General procedure for creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders

Follow steps 1 to 3 below to create, edit, or delete a user name or custom folder. In step 3, select the key for the

specific operation that you wish to perform.

1Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

2Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL]

key.

3Touch the key of the operation that you

wish to perform.

Go to the page indicated below for the selected

operation.

(1) [USER NAME REGISTRATION] key

Program a user name. (See the next page)

(2) [AMEND/DELETE USER NAME] key

Edit or delete a user name. (See page 7-26)

(3) [CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION] key

Create a custom folder. (See page 7-27)

(4) [AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER] key

Edit or delete a custom folder. (See page 7-28)

NOTES

●A previously stored name cannot be used when creating a new user name or custom folder. However, the same password

can be used more than once.

●A password cannot be omitted when creating a user name.

AGE SEND

COPY

JOB STATUS SYSTEM

SETTINGS

LINE

DATA

DEFAULT

SETTINGS

SENDER CONTROL

ADMINISTRATOR

ADDRESS CONTROL

TOTAL COUNT

DOCUMENT FILING

CONTROL

SYSTEM SETTINGS

DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL

USER NAME REGISTRATION

CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION

AMEND/DELETE USER NAME

AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

SYSTEM SETTINGS

7-25

■Programming a user name

To program a user name, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24, touch the [USER NAME REGISTRATION] key in

step 3, and then follow these steps:

1Touch the [USER NAME] key.

The lowest number that

has not yet been

programmed appears

automatically in "No.".

Touch the number to

display a character entry

screen and enter a user

name (maximum of 16 characters). See page 7-29

for the procedure for entering characters.

2Touch the [INITIAL] key.

A character entry screen

appears. Enter up to 10

search characters.

See

page 7-29 for the

procedure for entering

characters.

3Touch the [PASSWORD] key.

A password cannot be

omitted.

4Set a password for the user name (enter a

5-digit password with the numeric keys).

This will be the password

for the user name

entered in step 1.

As each digit is entered,

" changes to " ". If

you make a mistake,

press the [C] key and

then enter the correct number.

5Touch the [OK] key.

6If you wish to specify a folder for the user

name, touch the [STORED TO:] key. If you

wish to use the main folder, go to step 8.

7The folders that have been created appear.

Touch the desired folder. If you wish to

create a new folder, or if no folders have

been created, touch the [ADD NEW] key.

If you touched the [ADD NEW] key, program a

name for the folder as explained on page 7-27.

The user name programmed in step 1 is selected

as the user name of the folder.

8Touch the [EXIT] key.

You will return to the

"USER NAME

REGISTRATION"

screen.

"REGISTRATION IS

COMPLETED." will

appear highlighted next

to "No.".

9To exit, touch the [EXIT] key. To program

another user name, touch the [NEXT] key.

If you touched the [EXIT]

key, you will return to the

screen of step 3 on page

7-24. If you touched the

[NEXT] key, a new user

entry screen will appear.

Repeat steps 1 to 9 to

program a new user.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

No.001

USER NAME

PASSWORD

STORED TO:

SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE F

INITIAL

R THE FILE WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

No.001

USER NAME

PASSWORD

STORED TO:

SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FIL

Yamada

CANCEL

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

CANCEL

EXIT

10-KEY PAD.

REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.

No.001

USER NAME

PASSWORD

STORED TO:

SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE

Yamada

MAIN FOLDER

STORED TO:

ALL FOLDERS

CUSTOM FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER 3

CUSTOM FOLDER 5

CUSTOM FOLDER 7

CUSTOM FOLDER 6

CUSTOM FOLDER 4

CUSTOM FOLDER 2

CUSTOM FOLDER 8

ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRS UVWXY

MAIN FOLDER ADD NEW

1/1

– – – – –

EXIT

INITIAL

EXIT

WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED.

Yamada

SYSTEM SETTINGS

7-26

■Editing and deleting a user name

To edit or delete a user name, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24 and then follow these steps:

1Touch the [AMEND/DELETE USER NAME]

key.

2Touch the [USER NAME] key that you wish

to edit or delete.

A password entry screen will appear.

3Enter the 5-digit password with the

numeric keys.

After entering the password, the following screen

will appear.

●To edit a user name, perform steps 4 and 5.

●To delete a user name, perform steps 6 and 7.

[Editing]

4Touch the key of each item that you wish to

edit (edit as explained in steps 1 to 9 in

"Programming a user name" on page 7-

25).

When you have finished

editing the items,

"REGISTRATION IS

COMPLETED." will

appear highlighted next

to "NO.".

5When you have finished editing the

desired items, touch the [EXIT] key.

To edit another user

name, repeat steps 2 to

To exit, touch the [EXIT]

key in the screen of step

[Deleting]

6Touch the [DELETE] key.

7Touch the [YES] key.

You will return to the

screen of step 2. To

delete another user

name, repeat steps 2, 3,

5 and 6.

To exit, touch the [EXIT]

key in the screen of step

AMEND/DELETE USER NAME

AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER

USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE

SELECT USER NAME TO AMEND/DELETE.

Suzuki

Ono

Hasegawa

Sasaki

EXIT

UVWXYZOPQRSTJKLMNEFGHIABCD

ALL USERS

Yamada

Nakata

1/1

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

CANCEL

BCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE

No.001

USER NAME INITIAL Yamada

Yamada

MAIN FOLDER

PASSWORD

STORED TO:

SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED.

DELETE EXIT

NOTE

When a user name is changed, the change is not

updated to any previously saved data (files or

folders).

USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE

No.001 REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.

USER NAME INIT

Yamada

MAIN FOLDER

PASSWORD

STORED TO:

SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE WITH

ITIAL Yamada

THIS USER NAME IS STORED

DELETE EXIT

ITIAL Yamada

H THIS USER NAME IS STORED

DELETE EXIT

DELETE THE USER NAME?

Yamada

NO YES

SYSTEM SETTINGS

7-27

■Creating a custom folder

Up to 500 custom folders can be created. When no further folders can be created, delete unneeded folders (page

7-28) and then create a new folder. A password can be omitted when creating a folder. To create a custom folder,

follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24, touch the [CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION] key in step 3, and then follow

the steps below.

1Touch the [FOLDER NAME] key.

The lowest number that

has not yet been

programmed appears

automatically in "No.".

Touch the number to

display a character entry

screen and enter a folder

name (maximum of 28 characters). See page 7-29

for the procedure for entering characters.

2Touch the [INITIAL] key.

A character entry screen

appears. Enter up to 10

search characters.

See

page 7-29 for the

procedure for entering

characters.

3If you wish to set a password for the new

folder, touch the [PASSWORD] key.

A password can be

omitted.

If you are omitting a

password, go to step 6.

4Set a password for the folder (enter a 5-

digit password with the numeric keys).

This will be the password

for the folder name

entered in step 1.

5Touch the [OK] key.

6Touch the [USER NAME] key.

You will select a user

name that will be

associated with the

folder name you are

programming.

Selection of a user name

cannot be omitted.

The programmed user names appear.

Touch the desired user name. If you do not

wish to use any of the user names that

appear, touch the [ADD NEW] key to

program a new user name.

When you touch a user name, a password entry

screen appears.

If you touched the [ADD NEW] key, program a user

name as explained on page 7-25. The folder name

programmed in step 1 will be selected as the folder

for the user.

8Enter the 5-digit password of the selected

user name with the numeric keys.

CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION

No.001

FOLDER NAME

INITIAL

USER NAME

CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION

No.001

FOLDER NAME

INITIAL

USER NAME

USER FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION

No.001

FOLDER NAME

INITIAL

USER NAME

USER FOLDER 1

PASSWORD

CANCEL

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

CANCEL

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

CANCEL

EXIT

10-KEY PAD.

No.001

FOLDER NAME USER FOLDER 1

INITIAL USER1

USER NAME

PAS

CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION

SELECT USER NAME. OK

ALL FOLDERS ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

ADD NEW

1/1

Suzuki Sasaki

Nakata

Yamada

Hasegawa

Ono

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

CANCEL

BCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

SYSTEM SETTINGS

7-28

9Touch the [OK] key.

To exit, touch the [EXIT] key. To create

another folder, touch the [NEXT] key.

If you touched the [EXIT]

key, you will return to the

screen of step 3 on page

7-24. If you touched the

[NEXT] key, a new folder

screen will appear.

Repeat steps 1 to 10 to

create a new folder.

■Editing/deleting a custom folder

To edit a previously created folder (change the folder name, initial, password, or user name), or to delete a folder,

follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24 and then follow the steps below.

1Touch the [AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM

FOLDER] key.

2Touch the [FOLDER NAME] key that you

wish to edit or delete.

If a password has been set for the folder, a

password entry screen will appear. Enter the

correct 5-digit password with the numeric keys.

3Edit or delete the folder.

●To edit the folder, perform steps 4 and 5.

●To delete the folder, perform steps 6 and 7.

●To exit, touch the [EXIT] key.

[Editing]

4Touch the key of each item that you wish to

edit (edit as explained in steps 1 to 10 of

"Creating a custom folder" on page 7-27).

After editing the items and returning to the screen of

step 3, "REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED." will be

highlighted to the right of "No.".

To stop using a password, touch the

[PASSWORD] key and then touch the [OK] key

without entering anything for the password. [-] will

appear and the password will be cancelled.

5When you have finished editing the items,

touch the [EXIT] key.

To edit another folder, repeat steps 2 to 5.

[Deleting]

6Touch the [DELETE] key.

7Touch the [YES] key.

You will return to the

screen of step 2.

To delete another folder,

repeat steps 2, 6, and 7.

To exit, touch the [EXIT]

key in the screen of step

JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

ADD NEW

1/1

SWORD

EXIT

When deleting a folder...

A folder that contains files cannot be deleted. Either move the files to a different folder or delete them before deleting the folder.

: [MOVE] (see page 7-22) : [DELETE] (see page 7-22)

AMEND/DELETE USER NAME

AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER

CUSTOM FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER 3

CUSTOM FOLDER 5

CUSTOM FOLDER 7

ALL FOLDERS

CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE

SELECT CUSTOM FOLDER TO AMEND/DELETE.

CUSTOM FOLDER 6

CUSTOM FOLDER 8

CUSTOM FOLDER 4

CUSTOM FOLDER 2

ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

EXIT

1/2

CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE

No.001

FOLDER NAME USER FOLDER 1

INITIAL USER1 *****

Yamada

USER NAME

EXITDELETE

PASSWORD

No.001

FOLDER NAME USER FOLDER 1

INITIAL USER1

Yamada

USER NAME

EXITDELETE

PASSWORD

REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.

CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE

– – – – –

EXIT

ORD

DELETE

DELETE THE FOLDER?

USER FOLDER 1

NO YES

7-29

ENTERING CHARACTERS

To enter or edit characters in setting screens such as auto dial key programming screens, follow the steps below.

Characters that can be entered are alphabetical characters, special characters, numbers, and symbols.

■Entering alphabetical characters

(Example: Sharp äÄ)

1Touch the [S] key.

To switch between upper case and lower case,

touch the [ABC abc] key. When ABC is

highlighted, upper case letters are entered.

2Touch the [ABC abc] key.

3Touch the [h] key, [a] key, [r] key, and [p]

key.

If you make a mistake, touch the key to move

the cursor ( ) back one space and then enter the

correct character. You can also press the [AB/ab

12#$%] key during entry to enter a number or

symbol.

4Touch the [SPACE] key.

The cursor ( ) moves forward and a space is

entered.

5Touch the [ ÃÄÂ/ãäâ] key.

6Touch the [ä] key.

To switch between upper case and lower case,

touch the [ÃÄÂ ãäâ] key. When ãäâ is

highlighted, lower case letters are entered.

7Touch the [ÃÄÂ ãäâ] key.

8Touch the [Ä] key.

You can press the [ABC/abc] key during entry to

return to alphabetical character entry. You can

also enter numbers and symbols.

9When finished, touch the [OK] key.

You will exit the character entry screen and return

to the programming screen. If you touch the

[CANCEL] key, you will return to the programming

screen without storing the entered characters.

Characters cannot be

entered beyond the " " mark.

Shar

Sharp

Sharp ä

Sharp äÄ

ENTERING CHARACTERS

7-30

■Entering numbers and symbols

1Touch the [AB/ab 12#$%] key.

When the characters "12#$%" are highlighted,

number/symbol entry mode is selected.

2Enter the desired number or symbol.

Numbers and symbols that can be entered are as

follows:

Screen 1/2

Screen 2/2

Change screens by touching the key or key

displayed in the screen. If you make a mistake,

touch the key to move the cursor ( ) back one

space and then enter the correct character.

You can continue touching keys to enter

characters. You can also touch another character

type selection key ([ ÃÄÂ/ãäâ] key or [AB/ab

12#$%] key) to enter characters other than

numbers and symbols.

3When you have finished entering

characters, touch the [OK] key.

You will exit the character entry screen and return

to the programming screen. If you touch the

[CANCEL] key, you will return to the programming

screen without storing the entered characters.

NOTE

The following symbols cannot be used when

entering a file name or folder name.

Spaces and the following symbols may be replaced

by other characters.

1&1

\?/";:,

<> ! * |&#

$% ' ( ) + -

.=@[ ]^`

{}~

7-31

TROUBLESHOOTING

This section explains problems frequently encountered when using the document filing function. If you experience

any difficulty, refer to the following table. For information on general machine problems, printer problems, fax

problems, and network scanner problems, please see the troubleshooting sections of the appropriate manuals.

Problem Check Cause and solution

A saved file has

disappeared.

Was the file called up and then printed by

touching the [PRINT AND DELETE THE

DATA] key?

A file that is printed using the [PRINT AND

DELETE THE DATA] key is automatically

deleted after being printed. To print a file

without deleting it, use the [PRINT AND

SAVE THE DATA] key.

A file cannot be

deleted.

Is the file's attribute set to [PROTECT]? A file cannot be deleted when its attribute is

set to [PROTECT]. Change the attribute to

[SHARING] and then delete the file.

A file's attribute

cannot be set to

[CONFIDENTIAL].

Is the file in the main or custom folder? A file in the Quick File folder cannot be set to

[CONFIDENTIAL]. Move the file to a

different folder or set it to [PROTECT].

A file's attribute

cannot be changed

to [PROTECT].

Is the file set to [CONFIDENTIAL]? A file cannot be simultaneously set to

[CONFIDENTIAL] and [PROTECT]. If set to

[CONFIDENTIAL], use [PROPERTY

CHANGE] (page 7-21) to change the

attribute to [PROTECT].

A name in the Quick

File folder is cut off.

Was the name programmed in the advanced

transmission settings?

If the name was programmed in the

advanced transmission settings before the

file was saved in the Quick File folder, that

name will be used. However, if the name is

longer than the maximum name length of the

Quick File folder (30 characters), the excess

characters will be discarded.

Resolution settings

are not possible.

Was the file saved at low resolution? A saved file cannot be transmitted at a

resolution higher than the resolution at

which it was saved.

A file name cannot

be stored or

changed.

Have you entered prohibited characters in

the file name?

Certain characters (symbols) cannot be

used in file names. See "ENTERING

CHARACTERS" (entering numbers and

symbols) on page 7-29.

A custom folder

name cannot be

stored or changed.

Have you entered prohibited characters in

the folder name?

Certain characters (symbols) cannot be

used in folder names. See "ENTERING

CHARACTERS" (entering numbers and

symbols) on page 7-29.

The printing speed

of a saved file is

slow.

The file was saved using one of the following

resolution settings:

●200 x 200 dpi resolution.

●STANDARD (200 x 100 dpi) or FINE (200

x 200 dpi)

When a file is saved using one of the

resolutions setting at left, the printing speed

will be slower than when other resolution

settings are used.

Black dots appear

when a file that was

saved with the

document filing

function is printed.

Was the file saved at other than the following

resolutions?

●600x600dpi

●600x600dpi and HALF TONE

To check the resolution of the saved file,

touch the [DETAIL] key in step 5 on page 7-

16.

This problem can be alleviated by setting the

resolution to 600x600dpi when saving a file

with scan save. The problem can be further

alleviated by selecting HALF TONE after

setting the resolution to 600x600dpi, as light

images will be printed lightly.

8-1

CHAPTER 8

SPECIFICATIONS

This chapter contains useful information about the machine.

Page

SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................... 8-2

INDEX ..................................................................................................... 8-4

8-2

SPECIFICATIONS

Automatic document feeder

Type Console

Print system Electrophotographic system

Exposure system OPC

Developer system Dry-type two-component magnetic brush development

Paper feed system 4 trays and bypass tray

Fusing system Heater roller

Resolution Scan: 600 x 600 dpi, output: 600 x 600 dpi

Gradation 256 levels

Originals Sheets, bound documents

Maximum size: A3 or 11" x 17"

Copy paper Plain paper and special papers

Copy sizes Max. A3 or 11" x 17", min. A5R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, Postcard

Image loss: Max 8 mm or 21/64" (leading edge and trailing edge in total),

max. 8 mm or 21/64" (along all other edges in total)

Warm-up time 120 seconds or less

First-copy time

MX-M550U/MX-M620U/MX-M550N/MX-M620N

4.0 seconds or less*

MX-M700U/MX-M700N

3.5 seconds or less*

* When A4 (8-1/2

x 11

) size paper is fed horizontally from tray1

Copy ratio Variable: 25 to 400% in 1% increments, total 376 steps

Fixed presets: 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%, 200%

and 400% for AB system, 25%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 200% and 400%

for inch system.

Continuous copy 999 copies

Dimensions

(including automatic

document feeder)

728 mm (W) x 679 mm (D) x 1192 mm (H)

(28-43/64" (W) x 26-47/64" (D) x 46-15/16" (H))

Weight (main unit only) Approx. 185 kg (Approx. 408 lbs.)

Overall dimensions

(When tray is extended) 1263 mm (W) x 679 mm (D) (49-23/32" (W) x 26-47/64"(D))

Required power supply Local voltage ±10% (For power supply requirements, see the name plate located

on the back of the main unit.)

Power consumption 220 - 240V 8A 1.84 kW

120 - 127V 16A 1.8 kW

Operating conditions Temperature: 10ºC to 30ºC (50ºF to 86ºF)

Humidity: 20% to 85%

Type Two-side simultaneous scanning system

Original size A3 to A5 (11" x 17" to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2")

Capacity Maximum of 150 sheets (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) or total stack height of 19.5 mm

(49/64") or less.

Original exchange speed One-sided: 65 pages/min.

Two-sided: 76 sides/min.

Power supply Supplied from machine

Some discrepancies may exist in the illustrations and content due to improvements to the machine.

SPECIFICATIONS

8-3

* Noise emission when peripheral devices are installed

Continuous copying speed (when the offset function is not used)

MX-M550U/MX-M550N MX-M620U/MX-M620N MX-M700U/MX-M700N

Copy paper size 100% / Reduced / Enlarged

A3 (11" x 17") 30 copies/min. 34 copies/min. 39 copies/min.

B4 (8-1/2" x 14") 35 copies/min. 39 copies/min. 45 copies/min.

A4 (8-1/2" x 11") 55 copies/min. 62 copies/min. 70 copies/min.

A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R) 40 copies/min. 45 copies/min. 48 copies/min.

B5 (7-1/4" x 10-1/2") 55 copies/min. 62 copies/min. 70 copies/min.

B5R (7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R) 40 copies/min. 45 copies/min. 48 copies/min.

A5R (8-1/2" x 5-1/2"R) 40 copies/min. 45 copies/min. 48 copies/min.

Centre tray specifications

Output method Face-down output

Maximum number

of sheets

(80g/m2 (20lbs.)

/recommended

paper)

250 sheets*

Paper type Plain paper and special paper

* The maximum number of pages that can be held varies

depending on ambient conditions in the installation

location, the type of paper, and the storage conditions of

the paper.

Acoustic Noise Emission (measurement according to ISO7779)

Printing mode Standby mode

Sound power level LwA 7.3B 5.0B

Sound pressure level LpA

(reference)

Bystander positions 58dB(A) 34dB(A)

Operator position 58dB(A) 35dB(A)

Emission Concentration (measurement according to RAL-UZ62: Edition Jan. 2002)

Ozone 0.02 mg/m3 or less

Dust 0.075 mg/m3 or less

Styrene 0.07 mg/m3 or less

8-4

INDEX

[ ] key................................................................. 1-13

[#/P] key ............................................................... 1-13

■Numerics

1-sided copy.................................................. 4-7, 4-11

1-sided copy-Automatic document feeder.............. 4-7

1-sided copy-Document glass.............................. 4-11

256MB expansion memory board ........................ 1-12

2in1 ............................................................. 5-24, 7-12

2-sided copy.........................................1-3, 4-10, 4-13

■A

Acceptable originals ............................................... 4-2

Account number ................................................... 1-18

Additional fax memory.......................................... 1-12

Address control .................................................... 2-18

Adjusting the exposure.................................. 1-3, 4-14

Administrator settings........................................... 2-18

Alarm display........................................................ 3-16

All custom setting list............................................ 2-20

Application communication module............. 1-12, 3-19

Application integration module ............................. 1-12

Attributes ................................................................ 7-3

Auditing mode ...................................................... 1-18

Auto image ........................................................... 4-15

Auto power shut-off mode ...................................... 1-9

Automatic copy image rotation ............................... 4-4

Automatic document feeder .................1-10, 2-31, 4-2

Automatic document feeder .........................................

-1-sided copies.................................................... 4-7

-Acceptable originals........................................... 4-2

-Automatic two-sided copying ........................... 4-10

-Misfeed original................................................ 2-31

-Setting originals ................................................. 4-3

-User maintenance.............................................. 6-2

Automatic exposure adjustment ........................... 4-14

Automatic selection .............................................. 4-15

Automatic two-sided copying

-Automatic document feeder ............................. 4-10

-Document glass ............................................... 4-13

Automatic two-sided printing ................................ 2-13

Auxiliary tray......................................................... 2-10

■B

B/W reverse............................................1-6, 5-2, 5-31

Barcode font kit .................................................... 1-12

Binding change .................................................... 4-13

Book copy ..............................................1-5, 5-2, 5-26

Book original .......................................................... 5-5

Bypass tray.........................................1-10, 2-28, 4-20

■C

[C] key ........................................................... 1-13, 7-4

[CA] key......................................................... 1-13, 7-4

Call for service ..................................................... 2-32

[CALL] key............................................................ 1-16

Calling up and using a file .................................... 7-13

Calling up and using a saved file.......................... 7-15

-Delete............................................................... 7-22

-Detail................................................................ 7-22

-Move ................................................................ 7-22

-Print.................................................................. 7-17

-Property change .............................................. 7-21

-Send................................................................. 7-20

-Card shot ..................................1-6, 5-2, 5-29, 7-12

Centre erase........................................................... 5-4

Centre tray.....................................................1-10, 4-9

[CENTRE TRAY] key.............................................. 3-6

Changing the paper size in paper tray .........2-3 to 2-6

Clear all key................................................... 1-13, 7-4

Clear key ....................................................... 1-13, 7-4

Clock .................................................................... 2-18

Confidential ............................................................ 7-3

Contents....................................................... 0-5 to 0-6

Continuous copying speed ..................................... 8-3

[COPY] key........................................................... 1-13

Cover of the duplex unit........................................ 1-11

Covers/inserts ........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-12

Creating a custom folder ...................................... 7-27

Custom folder...........................7-3, 7-24, 7-27 to 7-28

■D

Data security kit.................................................... 1-12

Default settings..................................................... 2-20

[DETAIL] key......................................................... 1-16

Display contrast.................................................... 2-20

Display switching keys.......................................... 1-16

Disposal of hole punch scrap ............................... 3-10

Document feeder tray......................................4-2, 4-3

Document filing control......................................... 2-18

Document filing function..................................1-8, 7-1

Document filing user / folder list ........................... 2-20

[DOCUMENT FILING] key ............................ 1-13, 7-4

Document glass

-1-sided copies.................................................. 4-11

-Automatic two-sided copying ........................... 4-13

-Placing originals................................................. 4-3

-User maintenance.............................................. 6-2

Document transfer cover ............................... 2-31, 4-3

Dual page copy ........................................1-4, 5-2, 5-5

DUAL PAGE SCAN .............................................. 7-12

Duplex unit ........................................................... 1-11

■E

Editing and deleting

-Custom folder................................................... 7-28

-User names...................................................... 7-26

Energy saving features........................................... 1-9

Energy Star guidelines ........................................... 1-9

Enlargement......................................................... 4-15

Entering characters .................................. 7-29 to 7-30

Erase...............................................1-4, 5-2, 5-4, 7-12

INDEX

8-5

Examples of covers and inserts ............... 5-17 to 5-22

-Covers.................................................. 5-18 to 5-21

-Inserts .............................................................. 5-22

External account module............................. 1-12, 3-20

■F

Facsimile expansion kit ........................................ 1-12

Fax data receive/forward ...................................... 2-18

[FAX JOB] key ...................................................... 1-16

Features ................................................................. 1-3

[FILE FOLDER] key................................................ 7-5

Finisher ......................................................... 1-10, 3-2

[FINISHER TRAY] key............................................ 3-6

Front cover .................................................... 1-10, 3-2

Fusing unit..........................................1-11, 2-23, 2-24

■G

General procedure for using special functions....... 5-2

Greyed out............................................................ 1-14

Group .......................................................1-3, 3-4, 4-9

[GROUP] key.......................................................... 3-6

■H

[HDD STATUS] key................................................. 7-5

Heavy paper................................................ 2-12, 2-13

Highlighted ........................................................... 1-14

Hole punching ................................................. 1-8, 3-5

■I

Icon ......................................................1-14, 5-17, 7-5

[IMAGE SEND] key .............................................. 1-13

Information ........................................................... 2-23

Inserter.................................................1-8, 1-10, 3-14

Installation requirements ........................................ 0-2

Interior.................................................................. 1-11

Internet fax expansion kit ..................................... 1-12

[INTERNET-FAX] key ........................................... 1-16

Interrupting a copy run .................................. 1-7, 5-46

■J

Job build..........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-8, 7-12

Job programs ....................................1-6, 5-44 to 5-45

-Calling up......................................................... 5-45

-Deleting............................................................ 5-45

-Storing ............................................................. 5-44

Job status screen................................................. 1-15

[JOB STATUS] key ............................................... 1-13

■K

Keyboard select.................................................... 2-20

■L

Labels................................................................... 2-12

Landscape.............................................................. 1-2

Large capacity tray (AR-LC6)...............1-10, 2-7, 2-29

Large capacity tray (AR-LC7)...............1-10, 2-8, 2-30

Left cover of paper drawer ................................... 1-11

Left side cover release ......................................... 1-11

List print................................................................ 2-20

Loading paper ........................................................ 2-2

-bypass tray....................................................... 2-10

-tray 1 - tray 2 ...................................................... 2-2

-tray 3 .................................................................. 2-5

-tray 5 ........................................................2-7 to 2-9

LOGOUT .............................................................. 1-13

[LOGOUT] key............................................. 1-13, 1-18

Lower cover............................................................ 3-2

■M

Main features................................................ 1-3 to 1-8

Main folder.............................................................. 7-3

Main power switch.......................................1-11, 1-17

Main screen............................................................ 5-2

Manual exposure adjustment ............................... 4-14

Manual selection .................................................. 4-16

Margin Shift ..............................................1-4, 5-2, 5-3

Meaning of "R" ....................................................... 1-2

Mirror image ...........................................1-6, 5-2, 5-31

Misfeed...................... 2-23 to 2-31, 3-11 to 3-12, 3-18

Misfeed in the paper feed area................. 2-26 to 2-30

Misfeed original .................................................... 2-31

Misfeed removal ................................................... 2-23

-Tray 1 - tray 2 ................................................... 2-26

-Tray 3 - tray 4 ................................................... 2-27

-Automatic document feeder ............................. 2-31

-Bypass tray ...................................................... 2-28

-Finisher/saddle stitch finisher........................... 3-11

-Inserter............................................................. 3-17

-Transport area, fusing area, and exit area ....... 2-24

-Tray 5 ...................................................2-29 to 2-30

-Duplex unit ....................................................... 2-25

Mode select key ................................................... 1-15

Mode select keys........................................... 1-13, 7-4

More information on plain paper........................... 2-13

More information on special media ...................... 2-13

Multi shot................................................1-5, 5-3, 5-24

■N

Network expansion kit .......................................... 1-12

Network scanner expansion kit ............................ 1-12

Non-standard sizes .....................2-12, 2-14, 2-17, 4-5

Number of pages printed...................................... 1-18

number of pages transmitted (scanned)............... 1-18

Numeric keys.................................................1-13, 7-4

■O

Offset............................................................... 1-7, 3-4

[OFFSET] key......................................................... 3-6

Operation panel........................................... 1-10, 1-13

-Document filing function..................................... 7-4

-Inserter............................................................. 3-15

Original guides ....................................................... 4-3

Original orientation .......................................... 3-5, 4-4

Original size .............................................4-2, 4-5, 4-6

Output .............................................3-4, 3-6, 4-9, 4-12

Output tray.....................................................1-10, 4-9

INDEX

8-6

■P

Pamphlet copy..........................................1-4, 5-2, 5-6

Paper curled......................................................... 2-33

Paper tray settings ...................................... 2-14, 2-20

Part names

-Exterior ............................................................ 1-10

-Finisher and the saddle stitch finisher................ 3-2

-Inserter............................................................. 3-14

-Interior.............................................................. 1-11

-Operation panel ...............................1-13, 3-15, 7-4

-Trays................................................................... 2-2

Password................................................................ 7-8

Peripheral devices....................................... 1-10, 1-12

Photo.................................................................... 4-14

Photoconductive drum ......................................... 1-11

Placing originals..................................................... 4-3

Plain paper ............................................... 2-12 to 2-13

Portrait.................................................................... 1-2

Postcards ........................................2-10 to 2-11, 4-20

Power .......................................................... 1-17, 2-32

Power switch ............................................... 1-11, 1-17

Preheat mode......................................................... 1-9

Preset copy ratios................................................. 4-16

[PRINT JOB] key.................................................. 1-16

PRINT mode indicators........................................ 1-13

Printer condition ................................................... 2-18

Printer test page................................................... 2-20

[PRIORITY] key.................................................... 1-16

Proper storage ..................................................... 2-22

Protect.................................................................... 7-3

PS3 expansion kit ................................................ 1-12

Punch module ............................................... 1-11, 3-2

[PUNCH] key................................................. 3-6, 3-15

■Q

Quick File folder ..................................................... 7-3

[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key ................................... 7-5

■R

[READ-END] key.................................4-12, 5-8 to 5-9

Reduction ............................................................. 4-15

Reduction/Enlargement................................. 1-4, 4-15

Replacing the toner cartridges............................. 2-21

Right side cover.................................................... 1-11

Rotation copying .................................................... 4-4

■S

Saddle stitch.................................................... 1-8, 3-5

Saddle stitch finisher..................................... 1-10, 3-2

Saddle stitch tray.................................................... 3-2

[SADDLE STITCH] key .......................................... 3-6

Saving a document image file .................... 7-6 to 7-12

-Filing ........................................................ 7-7 to 7-8

-Print jobs............................................................ 7-9

-Quick file ............................................................ 7-6

-Scan save ............................................ 7-10 to 7-11

[SCAN TO] key..................................................... 1-15

[SCAN TO HDD] key .............................................. 7-5

[SEARCH] key........................................................ 7-5

Searching for a file ................................... 7-13 to 7-14

Selecting a function.............................................. 1-14

Selecting the exposure level................................. 4-14

Selecting the exposure mode............................... 4-14

Selecting the output tray......................................... 4-9

Sender control...................................................... 2-18

Sender control list ................................................ 2-20

Sending address list............................................. 2-20

Setting the paper size...............................2-14 to 2-17

Setting the paper type ..............................2-14 to 2-16

Sharing................................................................... 7-3

Sharp OSA........................................................... 3-19

Sort...........................................................1-3, 3-4, 4-9

[SORT] key............................................................. 3-6

Special modes (Copier operation).......................... 5-2

Special modes (Document filing function)............ 7-12

Special paper ........................................... 2-12 to 2-13

Special papers ..................................................... 4-20

Specifications ............................................... 8-2 to 8-3

-Finisher/saddle stitch finisher...................3-2 to 3-3

-Inserter............................................................. 3-14

-Large capacity tray (AR-LC6)............................. 2-7

-Large capacity tray (AR-LC7)............................. 2-8

-Punch module .................................................... 3-3

Specifications of paper trays ................................ 2-12

Standard sizes............................................... 1-2, 2-13

Standard sizes in both the AB and inch systems ... 1-2

Staple cartridge...................................................... 3-3

Staple cartridge replacement .......................3-7 to 3-8

Staple jam removal..................................... 3-9 to 3-10

Staple sort....................................................... 1-7, 3-4

[STAPLE SORT] key............................................... 3-6

[STAPLE] key ....................................................... 3-15

Stapler compiler ..................................................... 3-2

Stapling positions ................................................... 3-4

[START] key................................................. 1-13, 3-15

[STOP/DELETE] key ............................................ 1-16

Storage of supplies............................................... 2-22

System settings...........................................2-18, 7-24

[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key ............................ 1-13, 7-4

■T

Tab copy .................................................1-6, 5-2, 5-26

Tabbed paper............2-6, 2-10, 2-12 to 2-13, 3-15, 4-20, 5-12, 5-27

Tandem copy ..........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-10

Text....................................................................... 4-14

Text/photo............................................................. 4-14

The machine does not operate...................... 2-32, 6-3

Toner cartridge ............................................ 1-11, 2-21

Top cover................................................................ 3-2

Total count............................................................ 2-20

Total number of originals ........................................ 4-2

Touch panel...................................1-13, 1-14, 7-4, 7-5

Transparency film .............. 2-6, 2-12, 2-13, 4-20, 5-23

Transparency inserts ..............................1-5, 5-2, 5-23

Tray................................................................ 1-10, 3-2

Tray 1..........................................1-10, 2-2 to 2-4, 2-26

Tray 2..........................................1-10, 2-2 to 2-4, 2-26

Tray 3....................................................1-10, 2-5, 2-27

Tray 4....................................................1-10, 2-6, 2-27

Tray 5................................... 1-10, 2-7, 2-8, 2-29, 2-30

INDEX

8-7

Troubleshooting

-Copier operation ................................................ 6-3

-Document filing function................................... 7-31

-Finisher/saddle stitch finisher........................... 3-13

-General information ............................. 2-32 to 2-34

-Inserter............................................................. 3-18

Types and sizes of paper ......................... 2-12 to 2-13

Types and sizes of paper that can be used.......... 2-12

■U

Upper cover of large capacity tray........................ 1-11

User maintenance.................................................. 6-2

User name................................................ 7-24 to 7-26

■W

Warming up.......................................................... 2-32

■X

XY Zoom ....................................................... 1-4, 4-18

■Z

Zoom .................................................................... 4-16

Required in IEC-950 (EN 60 950) - Europe

• The equipment should be installed near an accessible socket outlet for easy disconnection.

Required in Appendix ZB of BS 7002 (En 60 950) — United Kingdom

MAINS PLUG WIRING INSTRUCTIONS

The mains lead of this equipment is already fitted with a mains plug which is either a non-rewireable

(moulded) or a rewireable type. Should the fuse need to be replaced, a BSI or ASTA approved fuse

to BS1362 marked or and of the same rating as the one removed from the plug must

be used.

Always refit the fuse cover after replacing the fuse on the moulded plug. Never use the plug without

the fuse cover fitted.

In the unlikely event of the socket outlet in your home not being compatible with the plug supplied

either cut-off the moulded plug (if this type is fitted) or remove by undoing the screws if a rewireable

plug is fitted and fit an appropriate type observing the wiring code below.

DANGER: The fuse should be removed from the cut-off plug and the plug destroyed immediately

and disposed of in a safe manner. Under no circumstances should the cut-off plug be inserted

elsewhere into a 13A socket outlet as a serious electric shock may occur.

To fit an appropriate plug to the mains lead, follow the instructions below:

IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:

GREEN-AND-YELLOW: Earth

BLUE: Neutral

BROWN: Live

As the colours of the wires in this mains lead may not correspond with coloured markings

identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND- YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug

which is marked with the letter E, or by the safety earth symbol Å@, or coloured green or green-

and-yellow.

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter

N or coloured black.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the

letter L or coloured red.

If you have any doubt, consult a qualified electrician.

WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.

➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣

➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢

➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢

➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣

SHARP ELECTRONICS (Europe) GmbH

Sonninstraße 3, D-20097 Hamburg

PRINTED IN FRANCE

TINSE3587GHZZ

MX-M550U/MX-M620U/MX-M700U/MX-M550N/MX-M620N/MX-M700N

OPERATION MANUAL (for general information and copier operation)

Sharp MX M620N M550U/N/M620U/N/M700U/N Operation Manual Copier GB User To The 0aa2aef0 D537 4473 9f55 15071352c713

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation